Express5800 140He
User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
000
Proprietary Notice and Liability Disclaimer
The information disclosed in this document, including all designs and related materials, is the
valuable property of NEC Computers International and/or its licensors. NEC Computers
International and/or its licensors, as appropriate, reserve all patent, copyright and other
proprietary rights to this document, including all design, manufacturing, reproduction, use, and
sales rights thereto, except to the extent said rights are expressly granted to others.
The NEC Computers International product(s) discussed in this document are warranted in
accordance with the terms of the Warranty Statement accompanying each product. However,
actual performance of each product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration,
customer data, and operator control. Since implementation by customers of each product may
vary, the suitability of specific product configurations and applications must be determined by
the customer and is not warranted by NEC Computers International.
To allow for design and specification improvements, the information in this document is subject
to change at any time, without notice. Reproduction of this document or portions thereof with-
out prior written approval of NEC Computers International is prohibited.
Trademarks
NEC ESMPRO and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are trademarks of NEC Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
Xeon is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. of the United States.
Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
ROM-DOS is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and
other countries.
Adaptec and its logo is a registered trademark of Adaptec, Inc. of United States.
SCSISelect is a trademark of Adaptec, Inc. of the United States.
Adobe, Adobe logo, and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
DLT and DLTtape are trademarks of Quantum Corporation of the United States.
All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective trademark owners.
rev 0.0 September 2005
Copyright 2005
NEC Computers International B.V.
Nieuweweg 279
6603 BN Wijchen
The Netherlands
All Rights Reserved
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally left blank.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep this User’s Guide at hand for quick reference at anytime necessary.
SAFETY INDICATIONS
Follow the instructions in this User’s Guide for your safety to use the server.
The server contains components with possible danger, hazards that may cause by ignoring warnings, and preventive
actions against such hazards.
Server components with possible danger are indicated with a warning label placed on or around them as well as
described in this User’s Guide.
In the User’s Guide or warning labels, "WARNING" or "CAUTION" is used to indicate a degree of danger. These terms
are defined as follows:
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may result in death or serious personal injury.
WARNING
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may cause minor personal injury, including
burns, or property damage.
CAUTION
Precautions and notices against hazards are presented with one of the following three symbols. The individual symbols
are defined as follows:
This symbol indicates the presence of a hazard.
An image in the symbol illustrates the hazard type. (Attention)
This symbol indicates prohibited actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a particular prohibited
action. (Prohibited Action)
This symbol indicates mandatory actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a mandatory action to
avoid a particular hazard. (Mandatory Action)
(Example)
Symbol to draw attention
Term indicating a degree of danger
CAUTION
High temperature.
Immediately after the server is powered off, its internal components such as hard disks are
very hot. Leave the server until its internal components fully cool down before
installing/removing any component.
Symbol indicating a prohibited
action (may not always be
indicated)
Description of the danger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYMBOLS USED IN THIS USER'S GUIDE AND WARNING LABELS
Attentions
Indicates that improper use may cause an electric shock.
Indicates that improper use may cause personal injury.
Indicates that improper use may cause fingers to be caught.
Indicates that improper use may cause the clip of a hand.
Indicates that improper use may cause fumes or fire.
Indicates a general notice or warning that cannot be specifically identified.
Indicates that improper use may cause loss of eyesight due to laser beam.
Prohibited Actions
Indicates a general prohibited action that cannot be specifically identified.
Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the server. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire may be caused.
Mandatory Action
Unplug the power cord of the server. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire may be caused.
Indicates a mandatory action that cannot be specifically identified. Make sure to follow the
instruction.
SAFETY INDICATIONS BY COLOUR OF THE PARTS
Only green area is available for hot swap or hot plug operation. To avoid electric shock, disconnect all AC power cords
before accessing to other parts especially blue area inside the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CE Statement
Warning: This is a Class A product. In domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures (EN55022).
This system is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT. This
label is located on the internal CD-ROM installed in your system.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Momentary voltage drop prevention:
This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop caused by lightning. To prevent a momentary voltage drop,
an AC uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit should be used.
Notes:
(1) No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of NEC Corporation.
(2) The contents of this User's Guide may be revised without prior notice.
(3) The contents of this User’s Guide shall not be copied or altered without the prior written permission of NEC
Corporation.
(4) All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this User’s Guide. If you notice any part
unclear, incorrect, or omitted in this User’s Guide, contact the service representative where you purchased this
product.
(5) NEC assumes no liability arising from the use of this product, nor any liability for incidental or consequential
damages arising from the use of this User’s Guide regardless of Item (4).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i
PREFACE
Welcome to the Express5800/140He server.
The Express5800 server holds powerful performance and employs the latest technology to implement a computer for
the next generation. With its potential capabilities, the server may be used as the workstation PC that configures a
client-server system and provides high-speed processing and superior reliability.
Read this User’s Guide thoroughly to fully understand handling of the server and appreciate its functions to the
maximum extent.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ii
ABOUT THIS USER'S GUIDE
This User’s Guide is a guide for proper setup and use of the server.
This User’s Guide also covers useful procedures for dealing with difficulties and problems that may arise during setup
or operation of the server. Keep this manual for future use.
The following describes how to proceed with this User’s Guide.
How to Use This User's Guide
To aid you in finding information quickly, this User’s Guide contains the following information:
Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server
includes information that needs attention to use the server. Make sure to read this chapter before setting up and
using the server.
Chapter 2 General Description
includes information necessary to use the server, such as names and functions of its components, handling of
the floppy disk and CD-ROM drives. It also includes requirements and advisory information for transfer and
disposal of the server.
Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server
tells you how to select a site, unpack the system, make cable connections, and power on your system.
Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server
tells you how to configure the system and provides instructions for running the BIOS Setup Utility and the
MegaRAID Configuration Utility, which is used to configure SCSI devices in your system. This chapter also
provides information on I/O board jumper settings.
Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
describes how to install the operating system.
Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities
describes how to install the utilities for the server. It also includes a description on using the attached "NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER" CD-ROM.
Chapter 7 Maintenance
provides you with all the information necessary to maintain successful operation of the server. This chapter also
includes a description on relocating and storing the server.
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
contains helpful information for solving problems that might occur with your system.
Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server
provides you with instructions for upgrading your system with an additional processor, optional memory, optional
add-in cards, hard disk drives, peripheral devices, and power supply.
Appendix A Specification
provides specifications for your server.
Appendix B Other Precautions
provides supplementary notes on using the server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iii
Appendix C IRQ and I/O Port Address
provides a list of factory-set IRQs and I/O port addresses assigned.
Appendix D Installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions
describes how to install Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions without using Express Setup. Using
the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions. See Chapter 5 for
details.
Appendix E Installing Windows Server 2003
describes how to install Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 without using Express Setup. Using the Express
Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server™ 2003. See Chapter 5 for details.
Appendix F Product Configuration Record Table
provides a table to be filled with your server configuration.
Text Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this User’s Guide. For safety symbols, see "SAFETY INDICATIONS"
provided earlier.
Items that are mandatory or require attention when using the server.
IMPORTANT:
Notes give important information about the material being described.
NOTE:
IN THE PACKAGE
The carton contains various accessories, as well as the server itself. See the packing list to make sure that you have
everything and that individual components are not damaged. If you find any component missing or damaged, contact
your service representative.
Store the provided accessories in a designated place for your convenience. You will need them to install
optional devices or troubleshoot the server, as well as to set it up.
Make a backup copy of each provided floppy disk, if any. Store the original disk as the master disk in a
designated place, and use its copy.
Improper use of any provided floppy disk or CD-ROM may alter your system environment. If you find
anything unclear, immediately ask your service representative for help.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
CONTENTS
About This User's Guide............................................................................................................................................... ii
In the Package..............................................................................................................................................................iii
Chapter 1 ...........................................................................................................................1-1
Notes on Using Your Server ............................................................................................1-1
Warning Labels..........................................................................................................................................................1-2
Safety Notes...............................................................................................................................................................1-3
General ..................................................................................................................................................................1-3
Power Supply and Power Cord Use.......................................................................................................................1-4
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection.................................................................................................1-5
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices........................................................................................................1-6
During Operation...................................................................................................................................................1-7
For Proper Operation .................................................................................................................................................1-8
Transfer to Third Party...............................................................................................................................................1-9
Consumables............................................................................................................................................................1-10
Disposal of the Server..............................................................................................................................................1-10
User Support ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-11
Chapter 2 ...........................................................................................................................2-1
General Description..........................................................................................................2-1
Overview....................................................................................................................................................................2-2
External View ........................................................................................................................................................2-3
Front View (with the Front Door Open) ................................................................................................................2-4
Front View (Switch and LED Panel).....................................................................................................................2-5
Rear View..............................................................................................................................................................2-6
Internal View .........................................................................................................................................................2-8
I/O Board...............................................................................................................................................................2-9
Processor Board...................................................................................................................................................2-10
Memory Board..................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
Management LAN Board .................................................................................................................................... 2-11
Standard Features.....................................................................................................................................................2-12
Power Supplies....................................................................................................................................................2-13
Peripheral Bays....................................................................................................................................................2-13
Recovering BIOS Data........................................................................................................................................2-15
SAF-TE Logic .....................................................................................................................................................2-15
System Cooling ...................................................................................................................................................2-15
System Board Features........................................................................................................................................2-16
Security................................................................................................................................................................2-18
EXPRESSBUILDER...........................................................................................................................................2-19
ESMPRO.............................................................................................................................................................2-20
Off-line Maintenance Utility ...............................................................................................................................2-20
System Diagnostic Utility....................................................................................................................................2-20
DianaScope..........................................................................................................................................................2-20
Using Your Server....................................................................................................................................................2-21
Security Lock (Locking the Front Cover)............................................................................................................2-21
POWER Switch...................................................................................................................................................2-22
POST ...................................................................................................................................................................2-22
SLEEP Switch .....................................................................................................................................................2-26
Floppy Disk Drive...............................................................................................................................................2-27
CD-ROM Drive...................................................................................................................................................2-28
Chapter 3 ...........................................................................................................................3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
Setting Up Your Server .................................................................................................... 3-1
Setup Flow................................................................................................................................................................. 3-2
Selecting a Site .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Unpacking the System............................................................................................................................................... 3-5
Connecting Peripheral Devices.................................................................................................................................. 3-6
Connecting Power Cord............................................................................................................................................. 3-8
Turning On the Server ............................................................................................................................................. 3-10
Installing Operating System .................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Installing Utilities .................................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Making Backup Copies of System Information....................................................................................................... 3-12
Chapter 4........................................................................................................................... 4-1
Configuring Your Server.................................................................................................. 4-1
System BIOS ~ SETUP ~.......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Starting SETUP Utility.......................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Description of On-Screen Items and Key Usage................................................................................................... 4-3
Configuration Examples........................................................................................................................................ 4-4
Menu and Parameter Descriptions ........................................................................................................................ 4-7
Disk Array Configuration – MegaRAID Configuration Utility –......................................................................... 4-29
Notes on Using.................................................................................................................................................... 4-29
Starting Configuration Utility.............................................................................................................................. 4-30
Menu Tree ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-31
Operating Procedures for Configuration Utility.................................................................................................. 4-34
Remote Management Function................................................................................................................................ 4-49
Default Network Settings.................................................................................................................................... 4-49
Server Setup ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-49
Configuring Management PC.............................................................................................................................. 4-50
Using Remote Management Console.................................................................................................................. 4-51
Configuring I/O Board Jumpers .............................................................................................................................. 4-77
Chapter 5........................................................................................................................... 5-1
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup ................................................... 5-1
About Express Setup ................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 ........................................................................................................................ 5-3
Installation Notice ................................................................................................................................................. 5-3
Setup Flow ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-6
Installing Windows Server 2003 ........................................................................................................................... 5-7
Installing and Setting Device Drivers.................................................................................................................. 5-10
Setting for Solving Problems .............................................................................................................................. 5-15
Installing Maintenance Utilities .......................................................................................................................... 5-18
Updating the System ........................................................................................................................................... 5-18
Making Backup Copies of System Information .................................................................................................. 5-18
Exceptional Setup................................................................................................................................................ 5-19
Chapter 6........................................................................................................................... 6-1
Installing and Using Utilities ........................................................................................... 6-1
EXPRESSBUILDER................................................................................................................................................. 6-2
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console................................................................................... 6-4
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console ................................................................................ 6-8
EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu).................................................................... 6-10
Configuration Diskette Creator................................................................................................................................ 6-11
ESMPRO................................................................................................................................................................. 6-15
Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................ 6-15
DianaScope.............................................................................................................................................................. 6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
Power Console Plus .................................................................................................................................................6-17
Major Functions...................................................................................................................................................6-17
Components.........................................................................................................................................................6-17
Server Setup ........................................................................................................................................................6-18
Management PC Setup ........................................................................................................................................6-19
BMC Online Update ................................................................................................................................................6-20
Hardware Requirement........................................................................................................................................6-20
Installation...........................................................................................................................................................6-20
Startup .................................................................................................................................................................6-22
Uninstallation ......................................................................................................................................................6-24
Error Messages....................................................................................................................................................6-26
Chapter 7 ...........................................................................................................................7-1
Maintenance ......................................................................................................................7-1
Making Backup Copies..............................................................................................................................................7-1
Also make a backup copy of the disk array configuration data if your system is in the array configuration. When your
hard disks have been auto-rebuilt due to a failure, it is recommended to make a backup copy of the configuration data.
To make a backup copy of the configuration data, use the configuration utility that is resident in the FLASH memory
on the optional disk array controller board. Refer to the manual supplied with the board.........................................7-1
Cleaning.....................................................................................................................................................................7-1
Cleaning the Server ...............................................................................................................................................7-2
Cleaning the Interior..............................................................................................................................................7-2
Cleaning the Keyboard and Mouse........................................................................................................................7-3
Cleaning CD-ROM................................................................................................................................................7-4
System Diagnostics....................................................................................................................................................7-5
Test Items...............................................................................................................................................................7-5
Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics.........................................................................................................7-5
Relocating/Storing the Server ....................................................................................................................................7-8
Chapter 8 ...........................................................................................................................8-1
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................8-1
System Viewers..........................................................................................................................................................8-2
Lamps ........................................................................................................................................................................8-3
POWER/SLEEP Lamp..........................................................................................................................................8-3
STATUS Lamp ......................................................................................................................................................8-3
DISK ACCESS Lamp............................................................................................................................................8-5
LAN1/LAN2 ACCESS Lamp ...............................................................................................................................8-5
UID Lamp..............................................................................................................................................................8-5
Attention Lamp......................................................................................................................................................8-6
Processor Board Error Lamp .................................................................................................................................8-6
Memory Board Error Lamp...................................................................................................................................8-7
I/O Board Error Lamp ...........................................................................................................................................8-8
Power Unit Error Lamp.........................................................................................................................................8-9
Fan Error Lamp ...................................................................................................................................................8-10
Thermal Error Lamp............................................................................................................................................8-10
Access Lamps......................................................................................................................................................8-10
Memory Board Lamps......................................................................................................................................... 8-11
Hard Disk Drive Lamp (DISK Lamp).................................................................................................................8-12
LAN Connector Lamps .......................................................................................................................................8-13
PCI Slot Lamps....................................................................................................................................................8-14
FAN Fault Lamps ................................................................................................................................................8-15
Error Messages ........................................................................................................................................................8-16
Error Messages after Power-on ...........................................................................................................................8-16
POST Error Messages .........................................................................................................................................8-17
Beep Codes..........................................................................................................................................................8-23
Error Messages on Virtual LCD ..........................................................................................................................8-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vii
Solving Problems..................................................................................................................................................... 8-29
Problems with Server .......................................................................................................................................... 8-29
Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions ............................................................................................ 8-35
Problems with Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000.................................................................................. 8-36
Problems with EXPRESSBUILDER .................................................................................................................. 8-40
Problems with Express Setup.............................................................................................................................. 8-41
Error Message during Disk Array Configuration ................................................................................................ 8-44
Problems with Master Control Menu .................................................................................................................. 8-45
Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator ................................................................................................... 8-45
Collecting Event Log............................................................................................................................................... 8-46
Collect Configuration Information .......................................................................................................................... 8-47
Collecting Dr. Watson Diagnostic Information........................................................................................................ 8-48
Memory Dump ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-48
Preparing for Memory Dumping......................................................................................................................... 8-48
Saving the Dump File.......................................................................................................................................... 8-49
Recovery for Windows 2000 System....................................................................................................................... 8-50
Off-Line Maintenance Utility .................................................................................................................................. 8-52
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility............................................................................................................ 8-52
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility ............................................................................................................ 8-53
Resetting the Server................................................................................................................................................. 8-54
Forced Shutdown..................................................................................................................................................... 8-54
Chapter 9........................................................................................................................... 9-1
Upgrading Your Server .................................................................................................... 9-1
Safety Notes............................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
Anti-static Measures.................................................................................................................................................. 9-3
Preparing for Installation and Removal..................................................................................................................... 9-4
Device Installation or Removal Procedure ................................................................................................................ 9-5
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive...................................................................................................................................... 9-5
Power Supply Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 9-10
5.25-inch Device ................................................................................................................................................. 9-14
Rear Access Cover .............................................................................................................................................. 9-17
PCI Access Cover................................................................................................................................................ 9-19
PCI Board............................................................................................................................................................ 9-20
Memory Board .................................................................................................................................................... 9-42
DIMM ................................................................................................................................................................. 9-45
Processor Board .................................................................................................................................................. 9-55
Processor ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-58
Appendix A........................................................................................................................A-1
Specifications ...................................................................................................................A-1
Appendix B........................................................................................................................B-1
Other Precautions ............................................................................................................B-1
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller ....................................................................................................B-1
Server Management Software ...............................................................................................................................B-1
Floppy Disk...........................................................................................................................................................B-1
CD-ROM...............................................................................................................................................................B-3
Tape Media............................................................................................................................................................B-3
Keyboard...............................................................................................................................................................B-4
Mouse....................................................................................................................................................................B-5
Appendix C........................................................................................................................C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
viii
IRQ and I/O Port Address................................................................................................ C-1
Appendix D....................................................................................................................... D-1
Installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions........................................................... D-1
Before Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.............................................................................................. D-1
Optional Boards Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ................................................................................. D-1
Updating System .................................................................................................................................................. D-1
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Which Has Been Upgraded to Dynamic Disk ..................................................... D-1
MO Device ........................................................................................................................................................... D-1
Media such as DAT .............................................................................................................................................. D-2
Partition Size ........................................................................................................................................................ D-2
Installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions...................................................................................................... D-3
Creating "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"............................... D-3
Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation .................................................................................... D-5
Updating the System............................................................................................................................................. D-6
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings................................................................................................................ D-7
PROSet................................................................................................................................................................. D-7
Network Driver..................................................................................................................................................... D-8
Optional Network Board Driver........................................................................................................................... D-8
Graphics Accelerator Driver................................................................................................................................. D-9
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Adaptec 29320 / SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b) ................................................ D-9
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321).................................................................................... D-9
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information) ................................................................................. D-9
Appendix E ........................................................................................................................E-1
Installing Windows Server™ 2003 ..................................................................................E-1
Before Installing Windows Server™ 2003 ................................................................................................................E-1
Optional Boards Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ..................................................................................E-1
Updating System ...................................................................................................................................................E-1
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Which Has Been Upgraded to Dynamic Disk ......................................................E-1
MO Device ............................................................................................................................................................E-1
Media such as DAT ...............................................................................................................................................E-2
Partition Size .........................................................................................................................................................E-2
Installing Windows Server 2003................................................................................................................................E-3
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"....................................................E-3
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation ..............................................................................................................E-5
Updating the System..............................................................................................................................................E-6
Upgrade Installation ..............................................................................................................................................E-7
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings.................................................................................................................E-9
PROSet..................................................................................................................................................................E-9
Network Driver....................................................................................................................................................E-10
Re-install the Network Driver .............................................................................................................................E-10
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Initio 101 / Adaptec 29320)..........................................................................E-11
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b)...........................................................................E-11
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321)...................................................................................E-11
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information) ................................................................................E-11
Appendix F ........................................................................................................................E-1
Product Configuration Record Table..............................................................................E-1
Hardware ...............................................................................................................................................................E-1
Software.................................................................................................................................................................E-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Notes on Using Your Server
This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of your server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
WARNING LABELS
A warning label is attached to components with possible danger or their vicinity in your server to inform the user that a
hazardous situation may arise when operating the server. (Do not intentionally remove or damage any of these labels.)
If you find any label totally/partially removed or illegible due to damage, contact your sales representative.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-3
SAFETY NOTES
This section provides notes on using your server safely. Read this section carefully to ensure proper and safe use of the
server. For symbols, see "SAFETY INDICATIONS" provided earlier.
General
WARNING
Do not use the server for services where critical high availability may directly affect human lives.
Your server is not intended to be used with or control facilities or devices concerning human
lives, including medical devices, nuclear facilities and devices, aeronautics and space devices,
transportation facilities and devices; and facilities and devices requiring high reliability. We
assume no liability for any accident resulting in personal injury, death, or property damage if the
server has been used in the above conditions.
Do not use the server if any smoke, odour, or noise is present.
If smoke, odour, or noise is present, immediately turn off the POWER switch and disconnect the
power plug from the outlet, then contact your service representative. Using the server in such
conditions may cause a fire.
Keep needles or metal objects away from the server.
Do not insert needles or metal objects into ventilation holes in the server or openings in the
floppy disk or CD-ROM drive. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
CAUTION
Keep water or foreign matter away from the server.
Do not let any form of liquid (water etc.) or foreign matter (e.g., pins or paper clips) enter the
server. Failure to follow this warning may cause an electric shock, a fire, or a failure of the
server. When such things accidentally enter the server, immediately turn off the power and
disconnect the power plug from the outlet. Do not disassemble the server. Contact your service
representative.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4
Power Supply and Power Cord Use
WARNING
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.
Do not disconnect/connect the plug while your hands are wet. Failure to follow this warning may
cause an electric shock.
CAUTION
Plug in to a proper power source.
Use a proper wall outlet. Use of an improper power source may cause a fire or a power leak.
Do not install the server where you need an extension cord. Use of a power cord that does not
meet the power specifications of your server may heat up the cord and cause a fire.
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections.
The electric current exceeding the rated flow overheats the outlet, which may cause a fire.
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.
Heat generation resulting from a halfway inserted power plug (imperfect contact) may cause a fire.
Heat will also be generated if condensation is formed on dusty blades of the halfway inserted plug,
increasing the possibility of fire.
Use an authorized power cord only.
Use only the power cord that comes with your server. Use of an unauthorized power cord may
cause a fire when the electric current exceeds the rated flow.
Also, observe the following to prevent an electric shock or fire caused by a damaged cord.
Do not stretch the cord harness.
Do not pinch the power cord.
Do not bend the power cord.
Keep chemicals away from the power cord.
Do not twist the power cord.
Do not place any object on the power cord.
Do not bundle power cords.
Do not alter, modify, or repair the power cord.
Do not secure the power cord with staples or equivalents.
Do not use any damaged power cord. (Replace a damaged power cord with a new one of the
same specifications. Ask your service representative for replacement.)
Do not use the attached power cord for any other devices or usage.
The power cord that comes with your server is designed aiming to connect with this server and
to use with the server, and its safety has been tested. Do not use the attached power cord for
any other purpose. Doing so may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-5
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection
CAUTION
Never attempt to lift the server only by three persons or less.
Your server weighs 75 kg (depending on its hardware configuration). Carrying the server only by
three persons or less may strain your back. Hold the server firmly by its bottom with four
persons or more to carry it. Do not hold the front door to lift the server. The front door may be
disengaged from the server, causing personal injury.
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.
Do not install the server in the following places or any place other than specified in this manual.
Failure to follow this instruction may cause a fire.
a dusty place
a humid place such as near a boiler
a place exposed to direct sunlight
an unstable place
Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power source.
Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from the power outlet before
installing/removing any optional internal device or connecting/disconnecting any interface cable
to/from the server. If the server is off-powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source,
touching an internal device, cable, or connector may cause an electric shock or a fire resulted
from a short circuit.
Do not use any unauthorized interface cable.
Use only interface cables provided by us and locate a proper device and connector before
connecting a cable. Using an authorised cable or connecting a cable to an improper destination
may cause a short circuit, resulting in a fire.
Also, observe the following notes on using and connecting an interface cable.
Do not use any damaged cable connector.
Do not step on the cable.
Do not place any object on the cable.
Do not use the server with loose cable connections.
Do not use the equipment in the place where corrosive gases exist.
Make sure not to locate or use the server in the place where corrosive gases (sulphur dioxide,
hydrogen sulphide, nitrogen dioxide, chlorine, ammonia, ozone, etc) exist.
Also, do not set it in the environment where the air (or dust) includes components accelerating
corrosion (ex. sulphur, sodium chloride) or conductive metals. There is a risk of a fire due to
corrosion and shorts of an internal printed board.
Do not provide the wiring for the server to exceed the rating of the power supply.
To prevent burns, fires, and device damages, the power supplied to the server shall not exceed
the rating load of the power branch circuit. The server requires three or four Power Cords
(depending on your configuration). Connect each power cord to each appropriate Wall Outlet
provided with 20A branch circuit. Contact your electric constructor or the local power company
for the requirements on the wiring and installation of electric facilities.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-6
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices
WARNING
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the server on any occasion other than described
in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may cause an electric shock or fire as well as
malfunctions of the server.
Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.
A laser beam used in the CD-ROM drive is harmful to the eyes. Do not look into or insert a
mirror into the drive while the drive is powered. If a laser beam is caught in your eyes, you may
lose your eyesight (the laser beam is invisible).
Do not remove the lithium and NiMH batteries.
Your server contains lithium and NiMH batteries. Do not remove the battery. Danger of
explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Placing the battery close to a fire or in the water
may cause an explosion.
When the server does not operate appropriately due to dead lithium and/or NiMH batteries,
contact your service representative to replace it only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by us. Do not disassemble the server to replace or recharge the battery by
yourself.
Disconnect all the power plugs before accessing inside the server, or connecting the
peripherals.
The server has two power cords.
Make sure to power off the server and disconnect all power plugs from the power outlets before
cleaning or installing/removing internal optional devices. Touching any internal device of the
server with its power cords connected to a power source may cause an electric shock even of
the server is off-powered.
Disconnect all the power plugs from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug with a dry cloth.
Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty plug, which may cause a fire.
CAUTION
High temperature
Immediately after the server is powered off, its internal components such as hard disks are very
hot. Leave the server until its internal components fully cool down before installing/removing any
component.
Make sure to complete board installation.
Always install a board firmly. An incompletely installed board may cause a contact failure,
resulting in smoke or fire.
Protect the unused connectors with a protective cap.
The unused power supply cable connectors are covered with a protective cap to prevent short
circuits and electrical hazards. When removing the power supply cable connector from the
internal devices, attach a protective cap to the connector. Failure to follow this warning may
cause a fire or an electric shock.
Do not touch any electrical component inside the server during the hot-swap replacement.
All power flows inside the server during the hot-swap of replaceable components (PCI add-in
cards, hard disk, cooling fan, and power supply). Do not touch the electrical components inside
the server to avoid an electric shock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-7
During Operation
CAUTION
Avoid contact with the server during thunderstorms.
Disconnect all power plugs from the outlets when a thunderstorm is approaching. If it starts
thundering before you disconnect the all power plugs, do not touch any part of the server
including the cables. Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Keep animals away from the server.
Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Do not place any object on top of the server.
An object placed on top of the server may fall down, resulting in damage to your property
around the server.
Do not use a cellular phone or pager around the server.
Turn off the cellular phone or pager. Radio interference may cause malfunctions of the server.
Do not remove the cooling fans.
Only an authorized service technician can remove the cooling fans from the server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
FOR PROPER OPERATION
Observe the following notes for successful operation of the server. Use of the server ignoring these notes will cause
malfunctions or failures of the server.
Install the server in a place that meets requirements for successful operation. For details, see Chapter 3,
"Setting Up Your Server."
Do not delete the hard disk partition exclusively provided for maintenance of the server although it may
appear on the operating system.
Make sure to power off the server before connecting or disconnecting cables between the server and
peripheral devices.
Verify that the access lamp on the server is unlit before turning off the server or ejecting the floppy disk.
The server management logic on your system board monitors and logs system voltage changes. When
plugging the power cord to the system, you may experience 10 seconds delay from the time you press the
POWER switch on the front panel. This is normal system operation and is required by the server management
logic.
When you have just turned off the server, wait at least 30 seconds before turning it back on.
Do not turn off the server until characters following our logo appear on the screen.
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet before relocating the server.
Some software includes a command to eject the CD-ROM tray. Make sure that the front door is opened before
running the command. Running this command with the front door closed may cause the CD-ROM tray or the
media to hit against the front door, resulting in a failure of the server.
Clean the server on a regular basis. (See Chapter 7 for cleaning.) Regular cleaning proactively prevents
various failures of the server.
Lightning may cause a momentary voltage drop. To prevent this problem, it is recommended to use an
uninterruptible power supply unit.
Check and adjust the system clock before the operation if any of the following conditions is applicable.
– After transport of the server
– After storage of the server
– After the server is entered into the pause state under the environmental condition enduring the server
operation (temperature: 10°C to 35°C, humidity: 20% to 80%)
Check the system clock at the rough rate of once per month. When the system clock is installed in a system
requiring high time precision, it is recommended to use a time server (NTP server).
If the system clock is remarkably delayed or advanced as the passage of time in spite of adjustment, contact
your service representative to ask for maintenance.
Store the unit under the storage condition (temperature: -10°C to 55°C, humidity: 20% to 80%, without
condensation) to allow built-in devices and the unit to operate correctly in the next operation.
Make sure to use optional devices supported by the server. Some non-supported devices may be physically
installed/connected but cause failures of the server as well as malfunctions of the server.
We recommend you use our genuine products. Some third-party products claim that they support the server.
However, repair of the server due to a failure or damage resulting from use of such third-party products will
be charged.
Playback of disks that do not conform to CD-ROM standards with the CD-ROM drive is not guaranteed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-9
TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY
The following must be observed when you transfer (or sell) the server or software provided with the server to a third
party:
Express server
Make sure to provide this manual along with the server to a third party.
IMPORTANT: About data on the hard disk
Be sure to take appropriate measures not to leak important data (e.g., customers'
information or companies' management information) on the removed hard disk to any third
parties.
Data seems to be erased when you empty "Recycle Bin" of Windows or execute the
"format" command of the operating system. However, the actual data remains written on
the hard disk. Data not erased completely may be restored by special software and used for
unexpected purposes.
It is strongly recommended that the software or service (both available at stores) for data
erasure should be used in order to avoid the trouble explained above. For details on data
erasure, ask your sales representative.
Provided software
To transfer or sell any software application that comes with the server to a third party, the following requirements must
be satisfied:
All provided software applications must be transferred and no backup copies must be retained.
Transfer requirements listed in "Software License Agreement" that comes with each software application must
be satisfied.
Software applications that are not approved for transfer must be uninstalled before transferring the server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
CONSUMABLES
Your server contains some components that are only good for a limited period of time and require replacement, such as
batteries, fans, the internal CD-ROM drive, the floppy disk drive, and the mouse. For stable operation of the server, we
recommend you replace these components on a regular basis. Contact your service representative for replacement or the
product.
DISPOSAL OF THE SERVER
Dispose of the server, all the internal devices, floppy disks, and CD-ROMs according to all national laws and
regulations. Also dispose of the power cord provided with the server to avoid diversion to some other devices.
IMPORTANT: For disposal (or replacement) of the battery on the IO board of the server,
contact your service representative.
NOTE: If the real-time clock battery on the I/O board reaches its life, the following
message appears on the display while running the POST. Contact your service
representative to replace the battery.
0250 System battery is dead –Replace and run SETUP
WARNING
Do not remove the lithium and NiMH batteries.
Your server contains lithium or NiMH batteries. Do not remove any battery. Danger of explosion
if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Placing the lithium or NiMH battery close to a fire or in the
water may cause an explosion.
When the server does not operate appropriately due to the failure of lithium and/or NiMH
batteries, contact your service representative to replace it only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by us. Do not disassemble the server to replace or recharge the battery by
yourself.
NiMH battery
Lithium battery
IO board
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-11
USER SUPPORT
When the server needs after-sales service, check if the warranty is still valid, and determine which service is necessary
as indicated on the "Certificate".
Before asking for repair, do the following when the server appears to fail:
1. Check if the power cord and the cables to other devices are properly connected.
2. See Chapter 8 to find if your problem fits the description. If it does, take the recommended measure for it.
3. Check if the software required for operation of the server is properly installed.
4. Check the server using a computer virus detection program. Computer virus detection programs are available
for purchase in stores.
If the server still appears to fail after you have taken the above actions, contact your service representative immediately.
Take notes on lamp indications of the server and alarm indications on the display unit before, it may provide a
significant help to your service representative.
When Having Your Server Repaired
Prepare the following when having your server repaired:
Certificate
Notes of the messages displayed on the display unit
Error information*
Records of the Express server and peripheral equipment
* Error information includes the Error Message shown in Chapter 8.
Prepare the error information only when required by your service representative.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-12
Setting Up a Healthy Work Environment
The longer you keep using the computer equipment, the more you become tired, which may
cause disorders of your body. When you use a computer, observe the following to keep
yourself from getting tired:
Good Working Posture
You have good posture if the following are satisfied when you use a computer:
• You sit on a chair with your back straight.
• Your hands are parallel with the floor when you put them on the keyboard.
• You look at the screen slightly lower than your eye height.
You have "good working posture" as described in the above when no part of your body is
under excess strain, in other words when your muscles are most relaxed.
You have "bad posture" when you sit with your back hunched up or you operate a display
unit with your face close to the screen. Bad working posture may cause eye strain or poor
eyesight.
Display Unit Angles Adjustment
Most display units are designed for adjustment of the horizontal and vertical angles. This
adjustment is important to prevent the screen from reflecting bright lights and to make the
display contents easy to see. You will not be able to keep "good working posture" and you
will feel more tired than you should if you operate a display unit without adjusting horizontal
and vertical angles.
Screen Brightness and Contrast Adjustment
The display unit has brightness and contrast adjustment functions. The most suitable
brightness and contrast depend on the individual and the working environment (well-lighted
room or insufficient light). Adjust brightness and contrast so that the screen will be easy to
see. An extremely bright or dark screen will give a bad effect to your eyes.
Keyboard slope Adjustment
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for slope adjustment. Adjust the
keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate. The adjustment assists in
reducing strain on your shoulders, arms, and fingers.
Equipment Cleaning
Clean equipment regularly. It is difficult to see the display contents on a dusty screen.
Keeping equipment clean is also important for your sight.
Fatigue and Rest
If you feel tired, you should stop working and do light exercises.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
General Description
This chapter provides information that you should be familiar with before using the server. It includes names and
functions of the components and features of the server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
OVERVIEW
Your server is a highly reliable, high-powered, fault-tolerant, high-capacity, multiprocessing server based on the 64-bit
Intel® Xeon™ Processor MP. It is a solid performer and offers the latest technology. The combination of computing
performance, memory capacity, and integrated I/O provides a high performance environment for many server market
applications. These range from large corporations supporting remote offices to small companies looking to obtain basic
connectivity capability such as file and print services, e-mail, web access, web site server, etc.
Your server includes a 3.5-inch diskette drive, a CD-ROM drive, a 3.5-inch hard disk bay, and removable media device
bay. In the basic configuration, the 3.5-inch hard disk bay supports up to five 1.0-inch height SCSI hard disk drives that
can be swapped in or out of the system without powering it down, if RAID functionality is configured in the system. If
the additional hard disk drive cage is installed in your server, the 3.5-inch hard disk bay supports up to thirteen 1.0-inch
height SCSI hard disk drives.
As application requirements increase, you can expand your server with an additional processor, additional memory,
add-in boards and peripheral devices: tape devices, CD-ROM, and hard disk drives.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-3
External View
1
3
4
2
1
Front door
Open the front door when you access to the POWER switch, the 5.25-inch device, the CD-ROM drive, or the
optional USB floppy disk drive or install or remove a hard disk drive, processor, memory board, and/or the DIMM.
2
3
4
Key slot
Insert the security key to lock or unlock the front door.
Rear access cover
Open the rear access cover to install or remove the PCI boards and fans.
Stabilizer (2 each side at front and rear)
Remove the stabilizers when converting the server to rack-mounting model.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
Front View (with the Front Door Open)
See "Lamps" described later.
2
3
5
1
8
7-3
1-1
2-1
7-4
4
2-2
1-2
3-0
2-3
4
7-2
1-3
6-5
3-1
6-4
6-3
6-2
3-2
6-1
3-3 3-4 5-1
4
6
1
3.5-inch floppy disk drive
Insert a 3.5-inch floppy disk to the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive to read data from the disk or write data to the disk.
1-1: Eject button 1-2: Disk slot
1-3: Floppy disk access lamp (lits green when accessing)
CD-ROM drive
The CD-ROM drive reads data from the inserted CD-ROM.
2-1: Emergency eject hole - 2-2: CD Tray eject button - 2-3: Access lamp lits orange when accessing)
3.5-inch disk bay
2
3
The 3.5-inch hard disk bay contains additional hard disk slots. Hard disk drives having the thickness of 1 inch can
be inserted into the slots. The number following the bold-faced character indicates the SCSI ID.
DISK lamp
4
5
Processor board
5-1: Processor board ejector
6
7
8
9
Memory board
6-1: Memory board ejector - 6-2: Memory board power lamp - 6-3: Memory board attention lamp
6-4: Memory board redundancy lamp - 6-5: Memory board attention switch
Additional memory board slot
The number following the bold-faced character indicates the slot number.
Additional memory board shall be installed in the slot #2, #3, and then #4 in this order.
5.25-inch device bay
DAT (digital audio tape) drive or optical disk drive may be installed in the 5.25-inch device bays. Slot #1 (right)
and slot #2 (left).
Additional 3.5-inch disk bay
Install the optional HotSwap HDD cage 3-drive SCSI Media Bay in this bay. With the cage, up to thirteen hard
disk drives can be connected to the server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-5
Front View (Switch and LED Panel)
1
2
3
4
5 to 10 from left
18
11 to 17 from left
19
1
POWER switch
The power switch is used to turn on/off the power. If you press the switch once, then the POWER/SLEEP lamp
goes on and the power is turned on. If you press the switch again, the power is turned off. The system is forcibly
shut down when the power switch is pressed continuously for four seconds or longer.
2
3
RESET switch
The reset switch is used to reset the server.
SLEEP switch
If you press the sleep switch once, the server enters into the sleep state (power saving mode). If you press the
switch again, the server recovers to the normal state. Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000 support this feature.
4
UID (Unit ID) switch
Pressing the UID switch turns UID lamp (blue) located on the front panel and the rear panel on and off.
5
6
7
8
9
POWER/SLEEP lamp
STATUS lamp
DISK ACCESS lamp
LAN1 access lamp
LAN2 access lamp
10 UID (Unit ID lamp)
11 DUMP lamp
12 Processor board error lamp
13 Memory board error lamp
14 I/O board error lamp
15 Power unit error lamp
16 Fan error lamp
17 Thermal error lamp
18 DUMP switch
The dump switch is used to collect the event logs having occurred in the server.
19 CLEAR switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
Rear View
1-4 1-3
1-2
1-1
2
8
7
10
9
11
12
14
13-2
13-1
15
17
16-2
18
3-4
17
3-3
16-1
21
19
3-2
18
20
3-1
6
5
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-7
1
2
3
Power supply unit
The power supply unit supplies DC powers to the server. The factory-installed power supply units are installed in
slots 1 and 2 and slots 3 and 4 are for optional power supply units for power redundant configuration.
AC inlet
The AC inlet is connected with the power cord. Each power supply unit has one socket. Use the provided power
cord.
Additional PCI board slot
3-1: 64bit/100MHz, hot-plug PCI-X
3-2: Hot-plug PCI-Express (x8)
3-3: Non-hot-plug PCI-Express (x4)
3-4: 32-bit/33MHz, non-hot-plug PCI
PCI slot Fault lamp
PCI slot POWER lamp
PCI slot error lamp
Mouse connector
4
5
6
7
Used to connect the optional mouse.
Keyboard connector
Used to connect the optional keyboard.
Printer port connector
8
9
Used to connect a printer with Centronics interface.
10 Serial port A connector
Serial port A connector is used to connect the server to a device with serial interface. The server cannot be
directly connected to a leased line through this connector.
11 Serial port B connector
To be used exclusively with the serial port B connector on the front panel.
12 Management LAN Port
13 ICMB connector
Used to connect a device having ICMB interface. The number following the bold-faced character shows the port
number.
14 Monitor connector
Used to connect the display unit.
15 USB connector
Used to connect a device with USB interface.
16 LAN connector
Used to connect a network system on LAN.
The number following the bold-faced character shows the port number.
17 LINK/ACT lamp
18 1000/100/10 lamp
19 BMC error lamp
20 Processor board error lamp
21 I/O board error lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
Internal View
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Power supply cage
Non-hot-plug PCI slot
Hot-plug PCI slot
Fan bay
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-9
I/O Board
9-6 9-3
17
16
15
14 13 12
1
11-6
11-3
11-2
9-2
9-5
11-5
11-4
11-1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9-1
10
6
9-4
1
2
3
Connectors for external devices
PCI slot error lamp (corresponds to PCI slots #1 to #9 from top)
PCI slot power lamp (upper) / PCI slot Fault lamp (lower)
(corresponds to PCI slots #4 to #9 from top)
4
PCI board slot (PCI slots #1 to #9 from top)
Slots 1, 2: Non-hot-plug PCI, 5V, 33MHz
Slot 3: Non-hot-plug PCI-Express (x4)
IPMB connector
BMC configuration jumper block
Jumper switch for CMOS/Password clear
Management LAN board connector
Fan connector
Slots 4 and 5: (Hot-plug PCI-Express (x8)
Slots 6 to 9: Hot-plug PCI-X, 3.3V, 100MHz
5
6
7
8
9
Number following the bold-faced number indicates port number.
SCSI connector
Ch-2, Ch-1, and HDD cage from left
Fan error lamp
10
11
Number following the bold-faced number indicates fan number.
Power BP connector
Lithium battery
12
13
14
15
16
17
DIMM connector for RAID
NiMH battery module for RAID
Battery module connector
LAN controller
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
Processor Board
1-1
1-2
1-4
1-3
2-1
2-4
3-1 3-2
2-2
3-4 3-3
2-3
1
2
3
VRM (Number following the bold-faced character indicates the socket number.)
Processor (Number following the bold-faced character indicates the socket number.)
Processor/VRM error lamp
(Number following the bold-faced character indicates the lamp number.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-11
Memory Board
6
5
7-4
8
7-3
7-2
7-1
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DIMM slot error lamp (DIMM slot #1 to 4 from bottom)
Memory board Eject switch
Memory board Power lamp
Memory board Attention lamp
Memory board Redundancy lamp
Memory board Attention switch
DIMM slot (Number following the bold-faced character indicates the socket number.)
The factory-installed memory board contains at least 2 x 512MB DIMM in slots 1 and
2.
8
Switch to turn on DIMM slot error lamp
Management LAN Board
1
2
4
3
1
2
3
4
ICMB #1 connector
ICMB #2 connector
Management LAN Port
I/O board connector
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
STANDARD FEATURES
High performance
Expandability
64-bit Intel® Xeon™ Processor MP
3.16GHz/1MB
Wide variety of optional I/O slots
Two 32-bit/33 MHz PCI slots
3.66GHz/1MB
3.33GHz/8MB (on specific configurations
only)
Four 64-bit/100 MHz PCI-X sots (support hot-plug)
Two PCI EXPRESS(x8) slots (support hot-plug),
One PCI EXPRESS(x4) slot.
High-speed memory access
(Supports DDRII 400-compliant
interleaved memory)
High-speed 1000BASE-T/
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T interface
(1000Mbps/100Mbps/10Mbps
supported)
Large memory of up to 32 GB
3.5-inch hard disk drive bay holds five hot-swap SCSI hard
disk drives. If additional hard disk drive cage is installed,
system can support up to 13 hot-swap SCSI hard disk drives.
Remote power-on feature
Up to four multi-processors are available for upgrade.
USB interface
High-speed disk access
(Ultra320 SCSI x 2)
Many Available Features
Graphic accelerator "Radeon7000M" support
El Torito Bootable CD-ROM (no emulation mode) format support
POWER switch mask
Software power-off
Remote power-on feature
AC-LINK feature
Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) feature
Baseboard Management Controller (BMC)
Remote console feature
High-reliability
Self-diagnosis
Memory mirroring feature
Online sparing memory feature
Memory hot-swap feature
MemoryRAID feature
Memory monitoring feature (single-bit error
correction/ double-bit error detection)
Memory/processor degradation feature
(logical isolation of a failed device)
Bus parity error detection
Power On Self-Test (POST)
Test and Diagnosis (T&D)
Maintenance Features
Off-line Maintenance Utility
Memory dump feature using the DUMP switch
Power Saving Feature
Sleep feature (available for Windows Server
2003/Windows 2000)
Thermal sensor
Easy and Fine Setup
Error notification
Internal cooling fan monitoring feature
Internal voltage monitoring feature
BIOS password feature
Security feature (security lock)
Redundant power supply
EXPRESSBUILDER (system setup utility)
Express Setup
Configuration Diskette Creator
SETUP (BIOS setup utility)
SCSI Configuration Utility (SCSI device utility)
Disk array (onboard)
Recovering BIOS Data
Management Utilities
ESMPRO
DianaScope
Advanced Remote Management
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-13
Power Supplies
When the additional power supply units are installed and system operates with four power supply units, the server can
continue its operation without interruption even if one of these power supply units fails (in the redundant configuration).
If an additional power supply unit is installed while the system is operating with three power supply units, a log that
represents "power recovery" is recorded in the system event log. This indicates that the power supply is in redundant
configuration and maximum configuration.
Peripheral Bays
The system supports a variety of standard PC AT-compatible peripheral devices. The chassis includes the following
peripheral bays:
Media bay for installing the standard 3.5-inch floppy disk drive (supports 720 KB and 1.44 MB floppy disk
media) and the standard CD-ROM drive.
A 5.25-inch device bay for installing up to two half-height 5.25-inch peripheral devices or a full-height
5.25-inch peripheral device such as an optional tape drive.
The SCSI hard disk drive bay for installing up to five SCSI hard disk drives. If you install the additional hard
disk drive cage, you can install up to thirteen SCSI hard disk drives.
The SCSI disk drives can be easily installed or removed. The drive carrier allows you to access to disk drives
from the front of the system. If disk drives are provided with RAID configuration within the system, a disk
drive can be swapped with another without power interruption in the system (hot-swap).
NOTE: The SCSI hard disk drive bays contain a hot-swap back plane that requires an
80-pin single connector attachment (SCA) connector on the drives that you install.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
Memory Mirroring / Memory RAID Feature
Memory Mirroring Feature
The memory mirroring feature places a memory board as spare memory in standby state. If the current memory board
encounters an uncorrectable error, the memory mirroring feature switches to the standby memory board. When this
feature is used, the current memory board and the standby memory board should be combined. Available combinations
are:
Mirroring with memory boards 1 and 2
Mirroring with a pair of memory boards 1 and 2 and a pair of memory boards 3 and 4
To enable the memory mirroring feature, the combined memory boards must have DIMMs of same capacity.
The table below shows combinations of memory boards installed.
Memory board 1
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
4GB (1GB*4)
Memory board 2
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
4GB (1GB*4)
Memory board 3
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
–
Memory board 4
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
–
A
B
C
Memory RAID Feature
If one of the four memory boards encounters an uncorrectable error, the memory RAID feature switches to the other
memory board to continue operation. To use this feature, four memory boards must be installed. Each memory board
must have DIMMs of same capacity.
The table below shows combinations of memory boards installed.
Memory board 1
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
4GB (1GB*4)
Memory board 2
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
4GB (1GB*4)
Memory board 3
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
4GB (1GB*4)
Memory board 4
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
4GB (1GB*4)
A
B
C
Setting BIOS
Start SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory RAS Feature] in order and set as follows:
To enable the memory mirroring feature: Select [Mirror].
To enable the memory RAID feature: Select [RAID].
Others
Memory capacity displayed on the operating system = total capacity of physically installed memory –
capacity for standby memory
Memory mirroring feature: 1/2 of actually installed memory capacity
Memory RAID feature: 3/4 of actually installed memory capacity
Enabling the memory mirroring or memory RAID feature does not influence the operations of applications.
Each feature is automatically disabled when an error message is displayed:
The following indicates that the memory mirroring /memory RAID feature has worked:
a) The Redundancy lamp on the front panel of the server lights green.
b) The failing DIMM group is degraded when the server restarts.
c) If an ESMPRO Agent has been installed, the following log is registered as a system log of Event Viewer:
Source name:
Event ID:
ESMCommonService
2313
Explanation:
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-15
Memory number: XX
Date/time: XX
d) If report setting is made through the ESMPRO Agent, Manager reporting and ALIVE reporting is
performed. The report contents are as follows:
Explanation:
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.
Memory number: XX
Date/time:
XX
Recovering BIOS Data
Two system BIOSes, primary and secondary, are used to realize the duplex configuration.
Normally, the system operates with the primary BIOS. If a primary BIOS data error occurs or if the device containing
the system BIOS fails, control is immediately transferred to the secondary BIOS. Thus, the activation of the system is
ensured.
At shipment, the latest version of system BIOS is stored both in the primary and the secondary BIOS. If you execute the
system BIOS update, the secondary BIOS is updated, and the updated BIOS becomes the primary BIOS. Thereafter, the
system is activated from that primary BIOS.
SAF-TE Logic
The SCSI backplane includes SAF-TE (SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosure) logic that provides an interface to the
disk subsystem that supports status signals, hot swapping drives, and enclosure monitoring.
The transport mechanism for the standardized alert detection and status reporting is the SCSI bus. Disk drives, power
supplies, cooling fans, and temperature are continually monitored and the conditions then reported over the SCSI bus to
the system. When used with RAID management software the user can be alerted of impending or imminent disk
conditions requiring attention. This allows the user to react to conditions that could normally go unnoticed until data
loss.
System Cooling
The chassis includes a hot-swappable fan module with six fans for cooling the processor(s), hard drives, and PCI cards.
The fan system is located in the middle of the chassis to pull cooling air through the chassis.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16
System Board Features
The following subsections describe the system board major components.
Processor
The processor board accommodates one to four 64-bit Intel® Xeon™ MP processors with 1 MB cache in an FC-PGA2
package.
DIMM Memory
To install or replace a DIMM, remove the memory board first.
One memory board is factory-installed in the server. Up to four memory boards (32 GB maximum) can be installed in
the server.
Install the DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) into the DIMM socket on the memory board of the server. DIMMs are
installed in the ascending order of DIMM socket numbers in the unit of two modules.
The controller automatically detects, sizes, and initializes the memory array, depending on the type, size, and speed of
the installed DIMMs, and reports memory size and allocation to the server via configuration registers.
NOTE: Use DIMMs that have been provided by us. Contact your service representative or
dealer for a current list of approved memory modules.
Onboard Video
The I/O board incorporates an ATI® Radeon® 7000M graphics accelerator with 16 MB of video SDRAM that supports
all standard IBM VGA modes. The embedded SVGA video subsystem supports:
Pixel resolutions up to 1024 × 768
CRT and LCD monitors up to 100 Hz vertical refresh rate
The I/O board supports disabling of the onboard video through BIOS Setup or when a plug-in video card is installed in
any of the PCI slots.
On Board RAID Controller
The I/O board includes an on-board RAID controller, which is composed of NQ80332 I/O processor and 53C1030 SCSI
host adapter. The on-board RAID controller supports the following features:
Dual-channel Ultra320 SCSI interface (CH0 and CH1)
Connect the HDD cage to CH0, and HDD cage or tape device to CH1.
RAID levels 0, 1, 5, and spanning of RAID1 and RAID5
256 MB of cache memory
Battery-backup cache memory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-17
Network Interface Controllers
NOTE: To ensure EMC product regulation compliance, the system must be used with
shielded LAN cables.
The I/O board includes Intel® 82546GB network interface controller (NIC). The Intel® 82546GB network interface
controller supports the following features:
Two channels of 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 1000BASE-T networks.
Direct 64-bit, 133 MHz interface to the PCI-X bus
82546GB provides standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Interface for 1000Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 10Base-T
(802.3, 802.3u, 802.3ab).
System Board Management Controller (BMC)
Server management is concentrated in the System Board Management Controller (BMC). The BMC and associated
circuitry are powered from a 5Vdc standby voltage, which remains active when system power is switched off, but the
AC power source is still on and connected.
The BMC supports DianaScope, which allows remote server management through networks.
See Chapter 6 or online document in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM for DianaScope.
One major function of the BMC is to autonomously monitor system management events, and log their occurrence in the
non-volatile System Event Log (SEL). The events being monitored include overheating and overvoltage conditions, fan
failure, or chassis intrusion. To enable accurate monitoring, the BMC maintains the non-volatile Sensor Data Record
(SDR), from which sensor information can be retrieved. The BMC provides an ISA host interface to SDR sensor
information, so that software running on the server can poll and retrieve the server's current status.
The BMC performs the following:
Monitors server board temperature and voltage
Monitors processor presence and controls Fault Resilient Boot (FRB)
Detects and indicates fan failure
Manages the SEL interface
Manages the SDR Repository interface
Monitors the SDR/SEL timestamp clock
Monitors the system management watchdog timer
Monitors the periodic SMI timer
Monitors the event receiver
Controls secure mode, including video blanking, diskette write-protect monitoring, and front panel
lock/unlock initiation
Controls Wake On LAN via Magic Packet support.
Degradation Feature
The degradation feature automatically isolates a failed DIMM, processor, or cooling fan to assure continuous operation
of the server when the POST (Power On Self-Test, self-diagnosis program after power on) detects such a DIMM,
processor, or cooling fan.
Failed DIMMs, processors, and cooling fans may be identified on the screen that the POST displays, or with the BIOS
setup utility, "SETUP." They may also be identified on the system that has ESMPRO installed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18
Remote Power-On Feature (Wake On LAN/PME)
The remote power-on function turns on the server through a network. It sends a special packet from the management
computer to a remote server to turn it on if the server is off-powered.
To enable this feature, you must select "Enabled" for "Wake On LAN/PME" in the Advanced Chipset Control of the
Advanced menu of the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4.)
The remote power-on feature is not available in the following cases. Press the POWER switch once to start the
operating system, and turn off the server in an appropriate procedure.
Abnormal previous system shut-down
No power supply to the server (due to turned-off breaker, disconnected power cord, power blackout, etc.)
NOTE: Wake On LAN feature is supported in 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T adapter on the
I/O board.
AC-LINK Feature
When the power cord of the server is connected to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit, the server supports the
power linkage feature that enables control over the power supply from the UPS to the server. AC-LINK feature can be
enabled or disabled with "AC-LINK" in the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4.)
Security
To help prevent unauthorized entry or use of the system, the system includes a full lockable front door and Server
Management software that monitors the system intrusion switches.
Security with Mechanical Locks and Monitoring
The front door of the server contains a mechanical lock to prevent access to the front of the computer chassis.
The server includes an intrusion switch for the rear access cover. When this cover is opened, the switch transmits an
alarm signal to the system board, where server management software processes the signal.
Software Locks via the System Setup Utility
The BIOS SETUP Utility provides a number of security features to prevent unauthorized or accidental access to the
system. Once the security measures are enabled, access to the system is allowed only after the user enters the correct
password(s). For example:
Enable the keyboard lockout timer so that the server requires a password to reactivate the keyboard and
mouse after a specified time-out period – 2 to 120 minutes.
Set and enable an administrative password.
Set and enable a user password
Set secure mode to prevent keyboard or mouse input and to prevent use of the front panel reset, power and
sleep switches.
Activate a hot-key combination to enter secure mode quickly.
Disable writing to the floppy disk drive when secure mode is set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-19
EXPRESSBUILDER
The CD-ROM that comes with your server contains a setup utility called " EXPRESSBUILDER." When you have first
installed the server or append features to the server, use the EXPRESSBUILDER to set up your server.
Refer to Chapter 6 for details.
The major functions of the EXPRESSBUILDER are:
To install the Operating System.
"Express Setup" helps you to install Windows system. (See Chapter 5)
To diagnose the system.
EXPRESSBUILDER includes the System Diagnostics to check your server. (See Chapter 6)
To create a support disk.
Use this function to create the support disks used to boot the utilities from the floppy disk, or the OEM floppy
disk used for a manual installation of Windows. (See Chapter 6)
To update the BIOS.
Use this function to update the system BIOS or firmware of the server. (See Chapter 6)
To update the Windows System*
"Update Express5800 System" in Master Control Menu (Windows-based EXPRESSBUILDER feature)
updates several resources of Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 or Microsoft® Windows® 2000. (See
Chapter 6)
To install the utilities.
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM includes some management software for Windows ( ESMPRO, DianaScope,
etc.) and maintenance utilities for DOS (System diagnostics, Off-line Maintenance Utility, etc.).
You can install the applications for Windows from Master Control Menu and install the utilities for DOS from
Tools menu. (See Chapter 6)
To read the online documents*
You can refer to the online documents from Master Control Menu. (See Chapter 6)
NOTE: Some features among those listed above can be used from the remote computer
via cross cable, modem, or LAN (remote console). See Chapter 6 for details.
* These functions are available under Windows system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-20
ESMPRO
ESMPRO is a server management software application that runs on the operating system. ESMPRO includes
ESMPRO Manager for the server monitoring terminal and ESMPRO Agent for the server.
NOTE: For details of major functions of ESMPRO, system configuration and setups with
ESMPRO, see Chapter 6.
Available functions of ESMPRO depend on the operating system you install. Ask your
service representative for details.
Off-line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is used for proactive maintenance and fault analysis of the server. Normally this utility
is used by the maintenance engineer.
Refer to Chapter 8 for details.
System Diagnostic Utility
The system diagnostic utility contained in EXPRESSBUILDER is useful to prevent hardware failures. See Chapter 7
for details.
DianaScope
DianaScope is a software application for remote management of the Express5800 series.
DianaScope can control the managed server even if operating system is not running on the managed server.
See Chapter 6 and online documentation in the EXPRESSBUILDER.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-21
USING YOUR SERVER
This section describes basic operations of your server including how to use devices such as floppy disk drive and
CD-ROM drive. See Appendix B for notes on using the floppy disk, CD-ROM, and accessories including keyboard and
mouse.
Security Lock (Locking the Front Cover)
The security lock on the front of the server is used to lock the front door.
Open the front door when turning on/off the server, accessing the floppy disk drive, CD-ROM drive, and/or 5.25-inch
device, and installing/removing the hard disk drive into/from the 3.5-inch disk bay.
IMPORTANT:
Use the security key coming with the server to release the security lock.
Some software applications have a command to eject a media in the CD-ROM drive or
5.25-inch device bay. Make sure that the front door is open before executing such a
command. If the command is executed while the front door is closed, the tray of the
CD-ROM drive or a media in the 5.25-inch device will strike the front door causing the
server failure.
Lock the front door
Unlock the front door.
Unlock the front door, hold the handle half height on the left side of the front door and pull it toward you to open. When
you close the front door, lock it with security key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-22
POWER Switch
Use the POWER switch to turn on/off the server.
Power On
Press the POWER switch on the front of the computer chassis.
The POWER/SLEEP lamp lights green.
POWER/SLEEP lamp
IMPORTANT:
If the power cord is connected to a power control device such as a UPS (Uninterruptible
Power Supply), make sure that the power control device is powered.
If the power cord is connected to the server, an initial diagnosis of the hardware starts.
The POWER switch does not work while in diagnosis. Wait for about 30 seconds, then
press the POWER switch.
Do not turn off the server until characters following our logo appear on the screen. The
time until the characters appear depends on your system configuration. Approximately,
it may take one to five minutes.
POST
POST (Power On Self-Test) is the self-diagnosis feature saved in the I/O board of the server.
When the power of the server is turned on, POST automatically runs to check the I/O board, memory board, processor,
keyboard, and mouse. During POST messages indicating the starts of several BIOS setup utilities may also appear.
At shipment of the server, it is set to have our logo appear on the display unit during POST. Pressing Esc allows the
information on the execution of POST to be displayed.
NOTE: The information on the result of diagnosis by POST can be displayed from the
start without the depression of Esc on the BIOS menu. If you desire it, change the setting
of "Boot-time Diagnosis Screen" on "Advanced" of the BIOS SETUP to "Enabled."
It may not always necessary to check the result of POST. Check the messages which may appear during POST in the
following cases:
Installation of the server
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-23
Suspicion of failure
Beep for many times in the period from power-on to operating system start
Appearance of an error message on the display unit
POST Flow
The flow of operations executed by POST is sequentially described below:
IMPORTANT: Depending on the system configuration, the message "Press Any Key"
requesting key entry may appear on the display screen. This is requested by BIOS on an
installed optional board. See the explanation described in the manual for the option and
press any key.
1. After power-on, POST is activated to start memory check. The message indicating the counted size of base
memory and that of additional memory appears at the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, the
following message appears at the bottom of the screen.
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network
NOTE: If you change the factory-default for [Extended RAM Step] in [Advanced] menu
of BIOS SETUP and execute the memory test, pressing Space allows the memory test to
be skipped.
It may take several minutes to complete memory check depending on the size of the memory installed in the
server. Similarly, it may take about a minute to display the proper information on the screen at rebooting.
2. Detects the RAID controller built in the server and displays the message prompting the start of the
MegaRAID Configuration utility (without any key entry for several seconds, POST is automatically
continued). Press the proper keys according to the screen display.
LSI MegaRAID BIOS
Version XXX (Build XXX XX XXXX)
Copyright(C) 2005 LSI Logic Corp.
HA-X (Bus XX Dev XX) MegaRAIS SCSI 320-2E
Standard FW XXXX DRAM = 256MB (SDRAM)
Battery module is present on adapter
Channel-0 ID-14 -- XXX XXXXX
Channel-1 ID-14 -- XXX XXXXX
X Logical Drive(s) found on the host adapter.
X Logical Drive(s) handled by BIOS
Press <Ctrl><M> or <Enter> to Run Config Utility
Or Press <Ctrl><H> for WebBIOS
Now press Enter to start the utility. Do not use Ctrl + M to start the utility.
For example, the SCSI BIOS setup utility must be used in the following cases:
Installation of an SCSI device in the 5.25-inch device bay
Connection of an external SCSI device (The removal of the SCSI cable for 5.25-inch device in the server
and the connection of the SCSI cable coming with the server (for external connection) are required.)
Modification of SCSI device connections within the server
When the SCSI BIOS setup utility is terminated, the server runs POST from its start again.
When more than one SCSI controller boards are installed on the PCI bus of the server, the messages
indicating the starts of the SCSI BIOS setup utilities for the installed boards appear in the following order:
PCI slot number PCI #3, PCI #4, PCI #5, PCI #8, PCI #9, PCI #6, PCI #7, PCI #1 and PCI #2. See Chapter 9,
List of Optional Devices and their Available Slots for details about boot priority.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-24
3. Displays the SCSI ID numbers used by the connected SCSI devices on the screen.
4. If one or more disk array controllers are installed, displays the message prompting you to start the Disk Array
BIOS setup utility.
Start the utility according to the message if you need to change the settings. Refer to the manuals of the disk
array controllers for details.
Without any entry, any of the following messages appears.
Notes when pressing Ctrl and any other keys during POST:
When you press Ctrl and any other keys during POST to start configuration utility or others, the key entry
rarely becomes invalid. If it occurs, press Ctrl again to resume the operation.
5. Displays the message notifying you the detection of the processor and the connected keyboard and mouse.
6. Displays any of the following messages.
Pattern 1:
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or <F12> to Network
Pattern 2:
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> to Network
Or Pattern 3:
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F12> to Network
Pattern 4:
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network
* The displayed message may vary depending on the device status.
NOTE: The operation or utility to be started at each key entry is described below. These
operations or utilities may not always be started.
Esc
Press Esc to display the boot menu at the end of POST. This menu allows you to select
the device to boot from.
Boot Menu
1. CD-ROM Drive
2. +Removable Devices
3. +Hard Drive
4. IBA GE Slot 0B20 v1222
5. IBA GE Slot 0B21 v1222
<Enter Setup>
F2
Press F2 to start the BIOS setup utility. Start the utility to change the setting of the
server to that fit to the environment in which the server is used. In general, the setting
may not be particularly changed by starting the utility excluding the case in which the
previous message accompanied by an error message appears. See Chapter 4 for setting
procedures and features of the parameters.
F4
Press F4 to start the Off-line Maintenance Utility from the maintenance partition. See
Chapter 6 for the maintenance partition.
F12
Press F12 to run the network boot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-25
F1
If message "Press <F1> to resume" appears, an error is detected during POST. See
"Error messages during POST" for the information on the messages and the proper
actions against the errors. If an error message appears, pressing F1 allows the BIOS
setup utility to be started.
7. When a password is set in the BIOS setup utility SETUP, the screen prompting you to enter the password
appears after the normal termination of POST.
The password can be entered for up to three times. If you enter the password incorrectly all the time, the
server cannot be started. In this case, turn off the power of the server, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
on the power to start the server again.
IMPORTANT: Set the password only after operating system is installed.
8. Starts operating system at the termination of POST.
POST Error Messages
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the screen. See Chapter 8 for POST error codes.
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before contacting your service
representative. Alarm messages are useful information for maintenance.
Power Off
Follow the procedure below to power off the server. If the power cord of the server is connected to a UPS, refer to the
manual that comes with the UPS or the manual for the application that controls the UPS.
IMPORTANT: Always allow POST to complete before turning off the server.
1. Shut down the operating system.
2. Press the POWER switch on the front of the server.
The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.
3. Power off peripheral devices.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-26
SLEEP Switch
The SLEEP switch allows you to save almost all power of the server (power-saving mode or sleep mode).
NOTE: To use the SLEEP switch, an operating system supporting the sleep feature is
required. (Available for Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000.)
POWER switch
SLEEP switch
POWER/SLEEP lamp
Press the SLEEP switch on the front of the server to place the server in the power-saving mode. (The POWER/SLEEP
lamp blinks.) In the power-saving mode, the server retains the memory data and the status of the previous operations.
To resume the original state, press the POWER switch. (It may take a little time to resume the original state.)
NOTE: The operational level in the power-saving mode depends on the operating system
in use. (Available for Windows 2000.)
IMPORTANT: Do not change system configuration while turning into the power-saving
mode or in the power-saving mode. Otherwise, you may fail to resume the original state.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-27
Floppy Disk Drive
Your server is equipped with the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive on its front to write/read data to/from a floppy disk.
Your server supports the following 3.5-inch floppy disks:
2HD floppy disk (double-sided high-density track type)
Stores data of 1.44 MB.
2DD floppy disk (double-sided double-density track type)
Store data of 720 KB.
Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit) before inserting a floppy disk into the floppy disk
drive.
When you completely insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, the drive clicks and the eject button on the
floppy disk is slightly pushed out.
NOTES:
You cannot use a 1.2 MB-formatted floppy disk.
When an unformatted floppy disk is inserted, the message notifying that date read is not
available and the message prompting formatting are displayed. Refer to the manual that
comes with the operating system to format the floppy disk.
If the floppy disk contains a system, powering on or restarting the server with the floppy
disk inserted boots the system from the floppy disk.
To eject the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive, press the eject button.
NOTE: Make sure that the floppy disk access lamp is unlit before ejecting the floppy disk.
Ejecting the disk when the access lamp is lit may destroy the disk data.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-28
NOTE: Use of the floppy disk
The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care.
Keep the following notes in mind to use it:
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes.
Attach the label to the correct position.
Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball-point pen.
Do not open the shutter.
Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.
Do not place anything on the floppy disk.
Do not leave the floppy disk in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct
sunlight or close to a heater).
Keep the floppy disk away from cigarette smoke.
Keep the floppy disk away from any liquid (e.g., water) and chemicals.
Keep the floppy disk away from any magnetic objects (e.g., magnet).
Do not pinch the floppy disk with a paper clip or drop it.
Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust.
A floppy disk has a write-protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental
erasure. You can read data from a write-protected floppy disk, but you cannot save data
into the floppy disk or format it. We recommend that you should write-protect any
floppy disk containing valuable data unless you are about to save data. To write-protect
a 3.5-inch floppy disk, use the write-protect switch provided on its back.
Write-protect switch
Write
Write
disable enable
The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media. Dust or thermal changes, as well as
operator's misconduct or sever failures, may cause loss of data. To avoid loss of data, we
recommend that you should make a back-up copy of your valuable data on a regular
basis. (Make sure to make a back-up copy of every floppy disk provided with the
server.)
CD-ROM Drive
Your server is equipped with the CD-ROM drive on its front to read data from a CD-ROM (read-only compact disk).
The CD-ROM provides larger and faster data read than the floppy disk.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions may
cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not leave the tray ejected from the CD-ROM drive.
Set a CD-ROM on the CD-ROM drive as follows:
1. Confirm that the power of the server is on (with the POWER/SLEEP lamp being lit green) before inserting the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-29
CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Press the Eject button on the front of the CD-ROM drive.
The tray comes out a little.
3. Hold the tray lightly and pull it out toward you until the tray stops.
4. Put the CD-ROM on the tray carefully and securely with the date recorded surface facing toward the tray.
5. As shown in the figure below, hold the tray with a hand and press the CD-ROM with fingers of another hand
to make the hole of the CD-ROM fit to the rotor at the centre of the tray.
Rotor
Press this part of
CD-ROM.
6. Push the front of the tray lightly to retract it into the drive.
IMPORTANT: If a noisy sound in driving the CD-ROM drive occurs after setting a
CD-ROM, set it again correctly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-30
To take out the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive, press the Eject button in the similar way in setting the CD-ROM to
make the tray go out.
If the access lamp is lit in orange, the CD is being accessed. Confirm that the access lamp is not lit before pressing the
Eject button.
As shown in the figure above, hold the tray with a hand and take the end of the CD-ROM lightly by the fingers of
another hand with the suppression of the rotor at the center of the tray to remove the CD-ROM from the tray.
After taking out the CD-ROM, return the tray into the drive.
When you fail to eject the CD-ROM tray with the Eject button and take out the CD-ROM from the server, follow the
procedure below.
1. Press the POWER switch to power off the server. (The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.)
2. Insert a metal pin of approximately 1.2 mm in diameter and 100 mm in length (a straightened large paper clip
will make a substitute) into the emergency hole on the upper front of the CD-ROM drive and gently push it in
until the tray is ejected.
IMPORTANT:
Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break.
If the above procedure does not let you take out the CD-ROM, contact your service
representative.
Emergency hole
3. Hold the tray and pull it out.
4. Take out the CD-ROM.
5. Push the tray back into position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-31
NOTE: Use of the CD-ROM
Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD-ROM for the server:
The playback of disks that do not conform to the CD-ROM standards with the
CD-ROM drive is not guaranteed.
Do not drop the CD-ROM.
Do not place anything on the CD-ROM or bend the CD-ROM.
Do not attach any label onto the CD-ROM.
Do not touch the signal side (nothing is printed on this side) with your hand.
Place the CD-ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray.
Do not scratch the CD-ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball-point
pen.
Keep the CD-ROM away from cigarette smoke.
Do not leave the CD-ROM in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct
sunlight or close to a heater).
When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD-ROM, wipe the CD-ROM from its
centre to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently.
Use CD cleaner to clean the CD-ROM. Do not use record spray/cleaner, benzene, or
thinner.
Keep the CD-ROM in a CD-ROM case when not in use.
If the CD-ROM emits loud noise in the CD-ROM drive, remove the CD-ROM and
insert it back again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-32
This page is intentionally left blank
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Setting Up Your Server
This chapter describes how to set up your server appropriate for your system, on a step-by-step basis.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
SETUP FLOW
Follow the flowchart below to set up the server.
Selecting a site
Select a suitable site for the server.
Unpacking the system
Unpack the server and accessories from the chipping carton box.
Connecting peripheral devices
Connect peripheral devices to the server.
Connecting the power cord
Connect the power cord to the server.
Turning on the server
Power on the server to start software setups. Setups depend on the optional internal
devices installed and the peripheral devices connected.
Installing the operating system
Install an operating system to the server. See Chapter 5.
Installing the utilities
Install the utilities in the provided EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
See Chapter 6.
Making backup copies of system information
After all the system setup procedures are completed, make backup copies of system
information.
System information is required for recovering the server from the trouble or after
replacing the system board.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-3
SELECTING A SITE
Read the following precautions before selecting a suitable site for your server. The following describes installation of
the server and connections to the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Never attempt to lift the server with three or less persons.
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.
The following figure illustrates a site suitable for installing the server.
Room that satisfies the following
Close enough to
connect the mouse
and the display.
conditions for operation: *
Temperature: 10 to 35ºC
Humidity: 20 to 80% (no
condensation)
Place having available
space of 150 mm or more in
front and rear of the server.
100 to 120 Vac/200 to
240 Vac parallel
bi-polar wall power
outlet with the ground
Install the server on the
floor or rigid, flat desk.
Clean and tidy room
Wall outlet to connect the
supplied power cord.
Place having a space enough to fully
open the front door (The front door
extrudes about 35 mm from the left
side of the server when fully opened.)
* It is recommended that the server should be used in a room where
temperature is in the range between 15 to 25ºC.
When you have selected a server site, hold the server by its bottom with at least four persons and carry it to the site,
then place it slowly and gently.
IMPORTANT: Do not hold the server by its front door to lift the server. The front door
may be disengaged and damage the server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4
Do not place the server in the following places. Placing the server in such places may cause malfunctions of the server.
Places with drastic changes in temperature (e.g., near a heater, air conditioner, or refrigerator)
Places with strong vibration
Places where corrosive gases (sulphur dioxide, hydrogen sulphide, nitrogen dioxide, chlorine, ammonia,
ozone, etc) exist.
And also, places where the air (or dust) includes components accelerating corrosion (ex. sulphur, sodium
chloride) or conductive metals.
On a non-anti-static carpet
Places with possibilities of falling objects
Places near a device generating intense magnetic field (such as a TV, radio, broadcast/communication antenna,
power transmission wire, and electromagnetic crane) is placed (If unavoidable, contact your service
representative to request proper shield construction.)
Places where a power outlet that shares the ground line with another (especially the one to which a device
with large power consumption is connected) must be used for the server
Places near equipment that generates power noise (e.g., contact spark at power-on/power off of commercial
power supply through a relay). If you must install the server close to such equipment, contact your service
representative for separate power cabling or noise filter installation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-5
UNPACKING THE SYSTEM
When you receive your system, inspect the shipping containers prior to unpacking. If the shipping boxes are damaged,
note the damage, and if possible, photograph it for reference. After removing the contents of the containers, keep the
cartons and the packing materials. If the contents appear damaged when you unpack the boxes, file a damage claim with
the carrier immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Connect peripheral devices to the server. The server is provided with connectors for a wide variety of peripheral devices
on its rear panel. The figures on the next pages illustrate available peripheral devices for the server in the standard
configuration and locations of the connectors for the devices.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Plug in to a proper power source.
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections.
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.
Do not use any unauthorized power cord.
Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power
source.
Device with USB Interface
Device with serial
(e.g., keyboard)
interface (e.g.,
To connect the device having
modem)
USB2.0 interface, use the USB
connector on the rear panel.
FRONT
NOTE: Make sure of the cable you are going to connect. The ICMB connector and the
front serial port B connector of this server have the same shape as the LAN connector. Be
careful not to connect a cable to a wrong connector.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-7
Finally connect the provided
power cord to the receptacle.
If connecting the server to UPS,
see the explanation below.
Use this inlet only
when an optional
power supply unit is
additionally installed.
Mouse
Printer with
Keyboard
parallel interface
Device with serial
interface (e.g.,
modem)
Display
unit
Hub
(multiport repeater)
Device with USB interface (USB2.0)
(e.g., terminal adapter)
Hub
(multiport repeater)
REAR
Network system on LAN
(connected via a hub)
Management Only
Device with ICMB interface
(e.g., disk expansion unit)
IMPORTANT:
Power off the server and a peripheral device before connection. Connecting a powered
peripheral device to the powered server will cause malfunctions and failures.
To connect a third-party peripheral device or interface cable to the server, contact your
service representative for availability of such a device or cable. Some third-party
devices may not be used for the server.
A leased line cannot be connected directly to the serial port connectors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8
CONNECTING POWER CORD
Connect the provided power cord to the server.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not plug the power cord in to an improper power source.
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections.
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.
Use the authorized power cord only.
1. Plug the provided power cord into the AC inlet on the rear of the server.
2. Plug the other end of the power cord into the wall outlet.
3. Secure the power cord with a cable tie.
Lever
Lock spring
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-9
To connect the power cord from the server to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS), use service outlets on the rear of
the UPS.
The UPS service outlets are categorized into two groups: SWITCH OUT and UN-SWITCH OUT. (They may be called
"OUTPUT1" and "OUTPUT2".)
To control power supply with an application (ESMPRO UPS Controller) that controls the UPS, connect the power cord
to a SWITCH OUT outlet.
For constant power supply, connect the power cord to an UN-SWITCH OUT outlet. (Plug a modem that has a
permanent connection to this outlet.)
<Example>
2
OUTPUT
OUTPUT(SWITCH OUT)
(UNSWITCH OUT)
AC100V 50/50HZ
UN-SWITCH OUT
(OUTPUT 2)
SWITCH OUT
(OUTPUT 1)
When the power cord is connected from the server to a UPS, change the BIOS setup of the server to link with power
supply from the UPS.
Change a parameter for "AC-LINK" under the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility. See Chapter 4 for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10
TURNING ON THE SERVER
Turn on the server and follow the on-screen instructions for setup.
IMPORTANT: Before turning on the server:
Some optional boards require setups with the SETUP utility before installation. If the
server has a PCI board with the PCI-to-PCI bridge installed, the SETUP utility is
enabled to launch. Check on the board specifications to find out whether it requires
pre-installation setups before actually installing the board.
Some installed optional devices or connected peripheral devices require setups before
proceeding to the next step.
To use the server with no optional devices installed besides the graphic board, install the
desired operating system to the server.
1. Make sure that the floppy disk drive contains no floppy disk and the CD-ROM drive contains no bootable
CD-ROM.
2. Press the POWER switch.
NOTES:
If the power cord is connected to the power control unit such as the UPS, turn on the
power control unit.
Connect the power cord and wait for about 30 seconds before pressing the POWER
switch. The POWER switch does not work for about 30 seconds after connecting the
power cord due to BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) firmware start-up.
Do not turn off the server until characters following our logo appear on the screen. The
time until the characters appear depends on your system configuration. Approximately,
it may take one to five minutes.
POWER switch
POWER/SLEEP lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-11
The POWER/SLEEP lamp on the front of the server comes on.
In a few seconds, our logo appears on the screen and the Power On Self-Test (POST) begins.
The POST runs automatically when you power on the server or reset it with a keyboard operation (Ctrl + Alt
+ Delete). The POST runs diagnostics, initializes the server, sets interrupt vectors, detects installed peripheral
devices, and boots the operating system (if installed). See Chapter 2 for detailed description on POST.
If the server halts before completing the POST, the POST emits a beep code indicating a fatal system error
requiring immediate attention. (See Chapter 8, "Troubleshooting," for troubleshooting information.)
During memory test, the POST displays the amount of memory it was able to access and test. Depending on
the amount of installed memory, it may take several minutes to complete the memory test.
NOTE: The factory-set is defined to hide the POST screen with our logo screen. You can
always change our logo screen to the POST screen by pressing Esc. To change the start-up
screen, use the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4 for details.)
During the POST, you will see the banner message to prompt you to launch the BIOS SETUP utility stored in ROM on
system board or on an installed option board.
Start the BIOS SETUP utility appropriate to your system environment to change the BIOS setup. For the BIOS SETUP
for the server, see Chapter 4. For the BIOS SETUP for the option board, refer to the manual that comes with the option
board.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-12
INSTALLING OPERATING SYSTEM
See Chapter 5 for installing the Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003.
To install other operating systems than listed above, contact your service representative.
IMPORTANT: Before installing the operating system, adjust the system date and time by
using the BIOS setup utility "SETUP". See Chapter 4 detail.
INSTALLING UTILITIES
Install the utilities that come with the server. See Chapter 6 for details.
MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server.
Save the information after completing the system setup.
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.
You can save the information as follows:
1. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and reboot the system.
2. Select [Tools].
3. Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].
4. Select [System Information Management].
5. Insert a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.
6. Select [Save].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Configuring Your Server
This chapter describes Basic Input Output System (BIOS) configuration.
When you install the server for the first time or install/remove optional devices, thoroughly read this chapter for better
understanding and correct setups.
SYSTEM BIOS ~ SETUP ~
The SETUP utility is provided to make basic hardware configuration for the server. This utility is pre-installed in the
flash memory of the server and ready to run.
The server is configured with the correct parameters using the SETUP utility and shipped in the best conditions. Thus,
you do not need to use the SETUP utility in most cases. However, you might wish to use the SETUP utility in the cases
described below.
IMPORTANT:
The SETUP utility is intended for system administrator use only.
The SETUP utility allows you to set a password. The server is provided with two levels
of password: Supervisor and User. With the Supervisor password, you can view and
change all system parameters of the SETUP utility. With the User password, system
parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.
Do not set any password before installing the operating system.
The server contains the latest version of the SETUP utility. Dialog boxes appear on your
SETUP utility, thus, may differ from descriptions in this manual. If you find anything
unclear, see the online help or ask your service representative.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2
Starting SETUP Utility
To run the SETUP utility, do as follows:
1. Power on the server.
Our logo appears on the screen (the POST screen may appear depending on the setting in SETUP.).
After a while, any of the following messages appears at the bottom of the screen.
Pattern 1:
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or <F12> to Network
Pattern 2:
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> to Network
Or
Pattern 3:
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F12> to Network
Pattern 4:
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network
* The displayed message varies depending on the device status.
2. Press F2 to start the SETUP utility and display its Main menu.
If you have previously set a password with the SETUP utility, the password entry screen appears. Enter the
password.
Up to three password entries will be accepted. If you fail to enter the password correctly for three consecutive
times, the server halts. (You can no longer proceed.) Power off the server.
NOTE: The server is provided with two levels of password: Supervisor and User. With the
Supervisor password, you can view and change all system parameters. With the User
password, system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3
Description of On-Screen Items and Key Usage
Use the following keyboard keys to work with the SETUP utility. (Key functions are also listed at the bottom of the
screen.)
Indicates the current menu.
Setup item menu
Indicates there
are submenus.
Online help
window
Parameter (high-lights upon selection) menu
Explanation of key functions
Selects an item on the screen. The highlighted item is currently selected.
Selects the Main, Advanced, Security, System Hardware, Boot, or Exit menu.
Changes the value (parameter) of the selected item. When a submenu option (an option
preceded by "f") is selected, these keys are disabled.
Cursor (↑, ↓):
Cursor (←, →):
– and +:
Enter
Esc
F1:
Press Enter to select (determine) parameters.
Displays the previous screen.
Press F1 when you need help on SETUP operations. The help screen for SETUP operations
appears. Press Esc to return to the previous screen.
F9:
F10:
Sets the parameter of the currently displayed item back to the factory set parameter.
Saves the modifications and exits Setup.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4
Configuration Examples
The following describes examples of configuration required to use software-link features or for system operations.
Link with Management Software
To link with the temperature monitoring feature of ESMPRO Agent
Select [Server] - [Thermal Sensor] - [Enabled].
To control power supply of the server with ESMPRO Manager via the network
Select [Advanced] - [Advanced Chipset Control] - [Wake On Lan/PME] - [Enabled].
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [StayOff].
UPS
To link power supply with the UPS
To power on the server when power is supply from the UPS
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [Power On].
To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS if the POWER switch was used to
power off
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [Last State].
To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [StayOff].
Boot
To change the boot order of devices connected to the server
Select [Boot] and specify the boot order.
To display POST check results
Select [Advanced] - [Boot-time Diagnostic Screen] - [Enabled].
You can also press Esc while our logo is on the screen to display POST check results.
To control from the HW console
Select [Server] - [Console Redirection] and set each item.
Memory
To enable the memory degradation feature
Select [Advanced] - [Memory/Processor Error] - [Halt].
To check the installed memory (DIMM board) status
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] and check the status indications.
The on-screen DIMM group numbers and socket locations on the IO board are associated as shown in the
following figure.
To clear the memory (DIMM board) error information
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] - [Memory Retest] - [Yes] and reboot.
Select [Server] - [Clear FRU LED] - [Yes] and reboot.*
* Only when [Server] - [FRU LED Feature] - [Enabled] has been selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-5
DIMM #4
DIMM #3
DIMM #2
DIMM #1
To enable the memory mirroring feature or memory RAID feature
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] - [Memory RAS Feature], and select [Mirror] or [RAID].
Processor
To enable the processor degradation feature
Select [Advanced] - [Memory/Processor Error] - [Halt].
To check the installed processor status
Select [Main] - [Processor Settings] and check the status indications.
The on-screen processor numbers and socket locations on the IO board are associated as shown in the
following figure.
To clear the processor error information
Select [Main] - [Processor Settings] - [Processor Retest] - [Yes] and reboot.
Select [Server] - [Clear FRU LED] - [Yes] and reboot.*
* Only when [Server] - [FRU LED Feature] - [Enabled] has been selected.
Processor #1
Processor #3
Processor #2
Processor #4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6
Security
To set passwords on the BIOS
Select [Security] - [Set Supervisor Password] and enter a password.
Supervisor password and User password can be set separately, and only User password has a restriction to
access to SETUP utility.
To enable/disable the POWER switch and SLEEP switch
To disable
Select [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit] - [Enabled].
To enable
Select [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit] - [Disabled].
IMPORTANT: Enabling [Power Switch Inhibit] disables forced shutdown (see Chapter 8)
as well as power on/off using the POWER switch.
To set the secure mode
Select [Security] - [Secure Mode] and set each item.
External Devices
To set up external devices
Select [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] and set up each device.
Internal Devices
To set up internal PCI devices of the server
Select [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] and set up each device.
To clear the hardware configuration data (after installing/removing internal devices)
Select [Advanced] - [Reset Configuration Data] - [Yes].
PCI Hot Plug
To install the PCI board with the PCI hot plug
Select [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Hot Plug PCI Control] - [Minimum/Middle/Maximum*]
* The setting varies depending on the PCI board subject to the hot plug. See the table below.
Board name
Setting Value
Minimum
Minimum
100BASE-TX Adapter
1000BASE-T Adapter
1000BASE-TX Adapter
Minimum
Saving the Configuration Data
To save the BIOS configuration data
Select [Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes] or [Save Changes].
To discard changes to the BIOS configuration data
Select [Exit] - [Exit Discarding Changes] or [Discard Changes].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-7
To resume the default BIOS configuration data (may differ from factory-set value)
Select [Exit] - [Load Setup Defaults].
To save the current value as user default
Select [Exit] - [Save Custom Defaults].
To load the user-defined default
Select [Exit] - [Load Custom Defaults].
Menu and Parameter Descriptions
The SETUP utility has the following six major menus:
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Boot
Exit
To set minute functions, select a submenu from the above menus. The following describes available functions and
parameters, as well as the factory-set, for each menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-8
Main
After entering SETUP, the Main menu appears first. To display a submenu, position the cursor on a selection that has a
submenu (preceded by symbol f) and press Enter.
The items which can be set on the Main menu screen and their functions are described below.
Option
Parameter
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Disabled
1.2MB
720Kb
Description
Set the time.
Set the date.
Set the settings of floppy disk drive A
(standard configuration).
Your Setting
System Time
System Date
Legacy Floppy A
5 1/4"
3 1/2"
Normally set to "1.44/1.25 MB 3.5".
[1.44/1.25MB 3 1/2"]
2.88MB 3 1/2"
[Disabled]
Legacy Floppy B
Set the settings of floppy disk drive B.
Set to "Disabled" since the server does not
support drive B.
1.2MB
720Kb
5 1/4"
3 1/2"
1.44/1.25MB 3 1/2"
2.88MB 3 1/2"
[Disabled]
Hard Disk Pre-Delay
Wait for the specified time until the first
access to the IDE device during POST.
3 seconds
6 seconds
9 seconds
12 seconds
15 seconds
21 seconds
30 seconds
–
Primary IDE
Master/Primary IDE
Slave
Displays the information on the device
connected to each channel on the submenu.
(Display only)
Language
[English (US)]
French
Select the language used for SETUP.
German
Spanish
Italian
[
]: Factory-set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-9
Processor Settings
Selecting "Processor Settings" on the Main menu shows the following submenu.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Parameter
Description
Your Setting
Processor Retest
[No]
Yes
–
Clears the error information on the processor.
Processor Speed
Setting
Indicates the frequency of the processor.
Processor 1-4
CPUID
–
A numeral indicates the ID of processor. "Disabled"
indicates that the processor is defected by BMC.
"Not Installed" indicates that the processor is not
installed.
(Display only)
Processor 1-4
L2 Cache Size
Processor 1-4
L3 Cache Size
–
–
Indicates the L2 cache of processor.
Indicates the L3 cache size if the processor has L3
cache memory.
Hyper-Threading
Technology
Disabled
[Enabled]
Setting this item to "Enabled" allows the
hyper-threading technology to be used in the ACPI
mode. From operating system that supports
Hyper-Threading Technology feature, the specified
number of processors is twice as many as the actual
number of the installed processors.
Execute Disable
Bit
[Disabled]
Enabled
Disables or enables the Execute Disable Bit feature of
the processor.
[
]: Factory-set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-10
Advanced
The Advanced menu appears if you move the cursor to the position of "Advanced."
To display a submenu, position the cursor on a selection that has a submenu (preceded by symbol f) and press Enter.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Parameter Description
Your Setting
Boot-time
Diagnostic
Screen
[Disabled]
Enabled
Specify whether the self-diagnosis (POST) running screen is
displayed or not on booting.
If this item is set to "Disabled," our logo appears during POST.
(Pressing Esc in the status causes the screen display to be
switched to the POST execution screen.
The Boot-time Diagnostic Screen is automatically enabled if the
Console Redirection is enabled.
Reset
Configuration
Data
[No]
Yes
Select "Yes" to clear the extended system configuration data
area (system information stored by POST). The parameter is
changed to "No" after the system is booted.
NumLock
On
Specify whether the NumLock is enabled or disabled on
booting.
[Off]
[Boot]
Halt
Memory/
Processor Error
Indicates whether POST is paused at the occurrence of a
processor or memory error during the execution of POST.
When processor error or Memory error is encountered, the
utility is not paused at the end of POST if this item is set to
"Halt" and even though "POST Error Pause" of "Server" menu is
"Enabled".
[
]: Factory-set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-11
Memory Configuration
Selecting "Memory Configuration" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Parameter
Description
Your Setting
DIMM Group Normal
Indicates the current memory status.
#1 - #8
Status
Not installed
Disabled
"Normal" indicates that the memory devices operate normally.
"Disabled" indicates that one or more memory devices are
defected.
"Not Installed" indicates that no memory devices are installed.
(Display only)
Memory
Retest
[No]
Yes
Clears the DIMM group error status information. Run this menu
when the failed DIMM(s) are replaced.
Extended
RAM Step
1MB
1KB
"1MB" indicates that the memory test is done in the unit of 1MB.
"1KB" indicates that the memory test is done in the unit of 1KB.
Every Location "Every-Location" indicates that every memory device is tested.
[Disabled]
Online Spare [Disabled]
Memory Enabled
Memory RAS [Normal]
"Disabled" indicates that only memory initialization is done.
Select "Enabled" to enable the Online Spare Memory feature.
Set the memory configuration. Select "Mirror" to enable the
memory mirroring function. Select "RAID" to enable the memory
RAID function.
Feature
Mirror
RAID
Hot-Add
Memory
Support
[Disabled]
Enabled
Specify whether to use the Hot-Add Memory feature on
Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise Edition or Datacenter
Edition. Select "Enabled" to use the Hot-Add Memory feature.
[
]: Factory-set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-12
PCI Configuration
Selecting "PCI Configuration" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen. Selecting an item on the screen
allows the proper submenu to appear.
See the table blow for the items.
Option
PCI Slot 1-9
Option ROM
Parameter
[Enabled]
Disabled
Description
Your Setting
Disables/enables the Option ROM BIOS on the PCI bus.
When the graphic accelerator board is installed or the disk
array controller or SCSI controller boards to be installed
are connected to the hard disk in which operating system
is installed, set this item to "Enabled." When the LAN
controller board with installation of the option ROM BIOS
is used but the board does not provide network booting,
set this item to "Disabled."
[
]: Factory-set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-13
Hot-plug PCI Control
Selecting "Hot-plug PCI Control" on the PCI Configuration submenu shows the following screen.
See the table blow for the items.
Option
Parameter
[Disabled]
Minimum
Middle
Description
Your Setting
Reserving
memory space for
PHP
Determines memory space at every empty slot for PHP
(PCI Hot-plug).
Reserved memory space is:
[Disabled]
Maximum
None
[Minimum]
6 (2+4) MB
[Middle]
48 (16+32) MB
[Maximum]
96 (32+64) MB
[
]: Factory-set
NOTE: The bus number of PCI slot varies depending on whether this parameter is set to
"Disabled" or others. Pay attention when you need to setup the program again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-14
Embedded SCSI/Embedded NIC/Embedded Video Controller
Selecting "Embedded SCSI", "Embedded NIC", or "Embedded Video Controller" on the PCI Configuration submenu
shows the following screen.
See the table blow for the items.
Option
Parameter Description
Your Setting
SCSI Controller
LAN Controller
Video Controller
Option ROM Scan*
[Enabled]
Disabled
Indicates whether the on-board controller is enabled or
disabled.
[Enabled]
Disabled
Displays the submenu for indicating whether the
expansion of BIOS of on-board controller is enabled or
disabled.
Do not set this option to "Disabled".
[
]: Factory-set
* Only displayed for SCSI and LAN controllers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-15
Peripheral Configuration
Selecting "Peripheral Configuration" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen..
See the table below for the items.
IMPORTANT: Note that the interrupt and/or base I/O address are not overlapped with
others. If the value set for the interrupt or base I/O address is used in another resource, the
yellow asterisk (*) appears. Reset any item with the yellow asterisk properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-16
Option
Serial Port A
Parameter
Disabled
[Enabled]
[3F8]
2F8
3E8
Description
Your Setting
Specify whether serial port A is enabled or disabled.
Base I/O Address
Selects the base address and interrupt (IRQ) for serial
port A. These menus are displayed when the Serial
port A is enabled.
2E8
Interrupt
IRQ 3
[IRQ 4]
Disabled
[Enabled]
3F8
[2F8]
3E8
Serial Port B
Base I/O Address
Specify whether serial port B is enabled or disabled.
Selects the base address and interrupt (IRQ) for serial
port B. These menus are displayed when the Serial
port B is enabled.
2E8
Interrupt
Parallel Port
Mode
[IRQ 3]
IRQ 4
Disabled
[Enabled]
Output Only
Bi-directional
EPP
Specify whether the parallel port is enabled or
disabled.
Selects the parallel port operation mode, base
address, interrupt (IRQ), and DMA channel. These
menus are displayed when the Parallel Port is enabled.
[ECP]
Base I/O Address
Interrupt
[378]
278
IRQ 5
[IRQ 7]
[DMA 1]
DMA 3
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
DMA channel
PS/2 Mouse
USB Controller
Specify whether the mouse is enabled or disabled.
Specify whether the USB controller is enabled or
disabled.
Legacy USB
Support
Specify whether the USB keyboard is made available
in operating system which does not support USB
formally.
[
]: Factory-set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-17
Advanced Chipset Control
Selecting "Advanced Chipset Control" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen. Positioning the cursor on a
menu (item preceded by symbol "f") and pressing Enter opens the corresponding submenu.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Multimedia Timer
Parameter
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Selecting "Enabled" enables this function if the
operating system supports HPET feature.
Your Setting
Wake On
LAN/PME
[Disabled]
Enabled
Specify whether the remote power-on function through
network is enabled or disabled.
Wake On Ring
[Disabled]
Enabled
Specify whether the remote power-on function through
a serial port is enabled or disabled.
Wake On RTC
Alarm
[Disabled]
Enabled
Specify whether the remote power-on function through
an RTC alarm is enabled or disabled.
[
]: Factory-set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-18
PCI Device
Selecting "PCI Device" on "Advanced Chipset Control" of the Advanced menu shows the following screen.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Parameter
Description
Your Setting
PCI IRQ line 1 - 5
PCI IRQ line 8
Disabled
[Auto Select]
Set the assignment of each of 7 interrupt signals on
the PCI bus to a specific IRQ request.
Parameter "11" cannot be selected if they are the same
as those set for BMC IRQ in the Server menu.
3
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
14
15
[
]: Factory-set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-19
Security
Positioning the cursor to "Security" shows the following screen.
Selectable only when
User Password is
registered
Selectable only when
User Password is
registered
If you press Enter with the selection of either "Set Supervisor Password" or "Set User Password," such a screen as
shown below appears (the screen shown in the figure below appears when "Set Supervisor Password" is selected).
Specify the passwords on the dialog box. Enter each of the passwords with up to seven characters including
alphanumeric characters and symbols.
IMPORTANT:
Set the passwords only after operating system is installed.
If you forget the passwords, contact your service representative.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Parameter
Description
Your Setting
Set User
Up to seven
alphanumeics
Up to seven
alphanumeics
Press Enter to display the user password input screen. For
this password, accessing to the SETUP menu is restricted.
Press Enter to display the supervisor password input screen.
This password enables all the SETUP menus to be accessed.
This setting can be done only on login with the password input
of "Supervisor" at start of SETUP.
Password
Set Supervisor
Password
Password on boot [Disabled]
Enabled
Specify whether the passwords are entered or not on booting.
At first the supervisor password must be set. If the supervisor
password is set and this option is invalid, BIOS determines
that a user is booting.
Fixed disk boot
sector
Secure Mode
Timer
[Normal]
Prevents data from being written to hard disks.
Write Protect
[Disabled]
1 minute
Specify the period from no input from the keyboard or mouse
to the point at which the system enters into the secure mode.
2 minutes
5 minutes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-20
Option
Parameter
10 minutes
20 minutes
60 minutes
120 minutes
[L]
Description
Your Setting
Hot Key
(CTRL+ALT+)
Specify the key with which the secure mode is started. Press
the selected key with the Ctrl and Alt pressed to start the
secure mode.
Z
Secure Mode Boot [Disabled]
Enabled
Specify whether the server is operated in the secure mode at
the start of the server.
Video Blanking
[Disabled]
Enabled
Specify whether the monitor is disconnected if the server is
entered into the secure mode.
Floppy Write
Protect
Power Switch
Inhibit
[Disabled]
Enabled
[Disabled]
Enabled
Specify whether data write to the floppy disk inserted into the
floppy disk drive is enabled or disabled in the secure mode.
Specify whether the power switch is enabled or disabled. If this
item is set to "Enabled," the power cannot be turned off by
using the POWER switch (including the forced shutdown). The
system cannot also enter the power saving mode by pressing
the SLEEP switch.
[
]: Factory-set
NOTE: The Secure Mode is used to restrict access from unauthorized users. In the Secure
Mode, the POWER switch, SLEEP switch, RESET switch, keyboard and mouse are
disabled. The lamps on the keyboard flash in order from the ScrollLock lamp, the
CapsLock lamp, and the NumLock lamp. To resume server operation in the normal state
from the Secure Mode, enter the user password from the keyboard and press Enter key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-21
Server
Positioning the cursor on "Server" shows the Server menu.
The items which can be set on the Server menu and their functions are described below. For the setting, first select
"System Management" or "Console Redirection" and press Enter to display the proper submenu.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Assert NMI Disabled
on PERR [Enabled]
Parameter
Description
Your Setting
Indicates whether PCI PERR is supported or not.
If this item is set "Enabled", the system offers an error
through the NMI when an error occurred.
Indicates whether PCI SERR is supported or not.
If this item is set "Enabled", the system offers an error
through the NMI when an error occurred.
Assert NMI Disabled
on SERR
[Enabled]
FRB-2
Policy
Disable FRB2 Timer Set this item to "Disable BSP".
[Disable BSP]
Do Not Disable BSP
Retry 3 Times
Boot
[Disabled]
Indicates whether the boot monitoring function is enabled or
Monitoring 5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
20 minutes
25 minutes
30 minutes
35 minutes
40 minutes
45 minutes
50 minutes
55 minutes
60 minutes
disabled on booting.
To use this function, install ESMPRO Agent. Do not use this
function if the system is booted from operating system
without installation of ESMPRO Agent or CD-ROM. Set this
item to "Disabled" if ARCServe uses the Disaster Recovery
Option.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-22
Option
Parameter
Description
Your Setting
Boot
[Retry 3 Times]
Appears when the boot monitoring feature is enabled. This
item indicates the processing at the occurrence of timeout
during boot monitoring.
Monitoring Retry Service Boot
Policy
Always Retest
If [Retry 3 times] is selected, the system is reset after the
occurrence of timeout and operating system boot is retried up
to three times. The failure in the third boot causes the boot to
be tried from the service partition.
If [Retry Service Boot] is selected, the system is reset after
the occurrence of timeout and operating system boot is
retried up to three times. Then the boot is tried from the
service partition for three times.
If [Always Reset] is selected, the system is reset after the
occurrence of timeout and operating system boot is retried
repeatedly.
Thermal
Sensor
BMC IRQ
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[IRQ 11]
Indicates whether the temperature sensor monitoring function
is enabled or disabled.
Indicates the IRQ of the BMC interrupt.
Post Error
Pause
AC-LINK
Disabled
[Enabled]
Stay Off
[Last State]
Power On
Indicates whether POST is aborted once at the end of POST
if an error occurs during the execution of POST.
Indicates the AC-LINK function. Shows the state of the power
of the server.
Power ON [0] - 255
Delay Time
Sets the power on delay time when "Power On" or "Last
State" is specified for AC LINK.
FRU LED
Feature
Disabled
[Enabled]
Select "Enabled" to turn on the error lamp to identify the
location if the system detects a failure.
Clear FRU [No]
Select "Yes" to turn off the FRU LED. When the faulty
component is replaced, turn off the FRU LED.
Enables or disables the Platform Event Filtering feature of the
baseboard management controller (BMC).
LED
Yes
Platform
Event
Disabled
[Enabled]
Filtering
[
]: Factory-set
The table below shows the operation when the AC power to the server is turn off once and then on again, depending on
the setting of "AC-LINK."
Setting of AC-LINK
System status before AC power off
Stay Off
Off
Last State
Power On
Operating
Aborting (DC power being off also)
Forced shutdown
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
* Press the power switch continuously at least four seconds. This forcibly turns off the power.
IMPORTANT: Set this item to "Power on" in order to link the AC power source supplied
from UPS when the server is connected to UPS.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-23
System Management
Selecting "System Management" on the Server menu shows the following screen.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Parameter Description
Your Setting
BIOS Version
Board Part #
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Indicates the version of BIOS. (Display only)
Indicates the IO board information. (Display only)
Indicates the system information. (Display only)
Indicates the chassis information. (Display only)
Board Serial #
System Part #
System Serial #
Chassis Part #
Chassis Serial #
BMC Device ID
BMC Device Rev
BMC Firmware Rev
SDR Rev
Indicates the BMC (Baseboard Management
Controller) information. (Display only)
Indicates the revision of SDR (Sensor Data Record).
(Display only)
PIA Rev
ARM MAC Address
–
–
Indicates the revision of PIA. (Display only)
Indicates the default DNS (Hostname) of
Management LAN Port. (Display only)
[
]: Factory-set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-24
Console Redirection
Selecting "Console Redirection" on the Server menu shows the following screen.
See the table below for the items.
Option
BIOS Redirection
Port
Parameter
[Disabled]
Serial Port A
Serial Port B
[Disabled]
Description
Your Setting
Selects the port to be used as the redirection port. The
parameters specified in Peripheral Configuration
submenu is used as address and interrupt.
ACPI Redirection
Port
Specify the I/O port address or interrupt level used in
ACPI headless console redirection.
If [Disabled] is selected, console redirection feature is
disabled.
Serial Port A
Serial Port B
Baud Rate
9600
[19.2K]
Specify the baud rate used for the interface with
successive hardware consoles.
38.4K
57.6K
115.2K
Flow Control
Console Type
None
Specify the flow control method.
Specify the console type.
XON/XOFF
[CTS/RTS]
CTS/RTS+CD
PC ANSI
[VT100+]
VT-UTF8
[Disabled]
Enabled
Remote Console
Reset
Specify whether the reset from remote console is
enabled or disabled.
[
]: Factory-set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-25
Event Log Configuration
Selecting "Event Log Configuration" on the Server menu and pressing Enter shows the following screen.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Parameter
Description
Your Setting
Clear All Event Log
–
Press Enter and select "Yes" to clear the system event
log.
[
]: Factory-set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-26
Boot
Positioning the cursor on "Boot" shows the Boot menu which is used to set the boot priority.
The server searches for devices in the order set in this menu on booting. Finding the boot software, the server starts the
software.
The priority of the boot devices can be changed by using the ↑, ↓, +, and - keys. Move the cursor to the desired device
with the ↑ or ↓ key and change the priority with the + or - key.
IMPORTANT: To boot EXPRESSBUILDER, set the priority of the devices as shown in
the figure above.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-27
Exit
Positioning the cursor to "Exit" shows the Exit menu.
The options on the menu are described below.
Exit Saving Changes
Select this item to terminate SETUP after saving the newly selected information in CMOS (non-volatile memory). The
selection of "Exit Saving Changes" causes the confirmation screen to appear.
If you select "Yes," SETUP is terminated with the newly selected information saved in CMOS (non-volatile memory).
Then the server automatically reboots the system.
Exit Discarding Changes
Select this item to terminate SETUP without saving the newly selected information in CMOS (non-volatile memory).
Selecting "Yes" allows SETUP to be terminated without storage of the modified information. If the setting value is
modified, the confirmation screen will appear.
Selecting "No" allows SETUP to be terminated without storage of the modified information. If you select "Yes" in the
next screen, SETUP is terminated with the modified information saved in CMOS. Then the server automatically reboots
the system.
Load Setup Defaults
Select this item to return all the values of SETUP to the default values. Selecting "Load Setup Defaults" causes the
confirmation screen to appear.
Select "Yes" to return the values to the default values. Select "No" to return to the Exit menu screen.
Save Custom Defaults/Load Custom Defaults
Running the Save Custom Defaults menu saves the current SETUP parameters as the user-defined SETUP defaults. The
Load Custom Defaults menu is used to restore the user-defined SETUP defaults.
Discard Changes
Select this item to return the values modified currently to the previous values before saving the values to CMOS.
Selecting "Discard Changes" causes the confirmation screen to appear.
Select "Yes" to discard the newly selected information and return to the previous values.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-28
Save Changes
Select this item to save the newly selected information to CMOS (non-volatile memory) without the termination of
SETUP. Selecting "Save Changes" causes the confirmation screen to appear.
Select "Yes" to save the newly selected information to CMOS (non-volatile memory)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-29
DISK ARRAY CONFIGURATION
– MegaRAID Configuration Utility –
MegaRAID Configuration Utility is a software application to configure the built-in hard disk drives in disk array
configuration using the onboard disk array controller.
Notes on Using
Note the followings to correctly configure the disk array:
There are different levels of recording RAID. This system supports RAID0, RAID1 and RAID5.
– RAID 0
Stores data on hard disks by dividing it (striping.)
Striping is a technology to store data on disks according to some rules.
Data is divided to be stored on multiple hard disks.
Where is the figure?All hard disks can be accessed at the same time. This improves disk access
performance compared with using a single hard disk.
IMPORTANT: RAID0 does not have data redundancy. When hard disk failure occurs,
data cannot be restored.
– RAID 1
Stores the data being saved to one hard disk drive to another hard disk drive.
This method is called "mirroring." When storing data onto one hard disk drive, the same data is
simultaneously stored onto another hard disk drive. When a hard disk drive becomes faulty, the one with
the same data can be used.
This provides operation without the system going down.
– RAID 5
Stores data onto hard disk drives by dividing it (striping) in the same way as RAID0. With RAID5, parity
(redundant data) is also divided and stored on multiple hard disks. This is called "distributed parity."
Distributed parity uses one section of a line divided with the set stripe size on hard disks in order.
Data is saved in the following order: Stripe1, Stripe2, created parity. Disk space allocated as a parity
section is the same as one hard disk within the RAID5 configuration.
Even if one of the configured hard disks becomes faulty, data can be used without any problem.
When you have configured or changed the disk array configuration, make a backup copy of the configuration
information. You can use the Power Console Plus to make a backup copy. See the online document "Power
Console Plus User's Guide" stored in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
Check the consistency of disk array system on a regular basis.
Consistency check is available for RAID5 or RAID1 only. Use one of the following three methods to check
consistency.
– Check by using this utility (described later in this section).
– Perform scheduled task from the command prompt after operating system start-up. (Refer to the online
document "Power Console Plus User's Guide" stored in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM or the manual
that comes with the option board.)
– Check by using the Power Console Plus. (Refer to the online document "Power Console Plus User's Guide"
stored in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.)
You can use the Power Console Plus to rebuild the failed hard disk drive as well as this utility. (Refer to the
online document "Power Console Plus User's Guide" stored in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.)
If a hard disk drive is specified as the standby disk, the data in the failed hard disk drive can be automatically
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-30
recovered by using the auto rebuild feature. The hard disk drive to be used as a standby disk must have the
same capacity and the same rotational speed as those of the other hard disk drives.
The following 5 types of hard disk status are displayed by MegaRAID Configuration Utility. Each status is
explained below:
[READY] Not yet configured.
[ONLIN] The disk is turned on and ready for normal operation. Configured into a pack.
[HOTSP] The disk is on and in Hot spare disk status.
[FAIL]
Judged to be faulty by the controller. Cannot be used.
[REBLD] Being rebuilt.
Starting Configuration Utility
MegaRAID Configuration Utility is stored in the BIOS of RAID controller on I/O board and started during POST
activation.
Starting MegaRAID Configuration Utility
Check that the following is displayed when you turn the power on your server
The manufacturer’s logo
The message “ Press <F2> to enter Setup, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network”
Then press Esc, POST screen is displayed.
Check that the following is displayed in the POST screen, then press Enter.
NOTE: When Ctrl + H is blinking onscreen, do not press Ctrl + H. If you press these keys,
WebBIOS starts after POST is completed. When WebBIOS is started, click [Control-M] at
the upper right of the screen to start MegaRAID Configuration Utility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-31
MegaRAID Configuration Utility: TOP menu (Management Menu) screen
NOTE: In some cases, the following display appears in the POST screen after replacing
the I/O board. This indicates that both the disk array controller and hard disk have
configuration information, and they do not match. (Shown below is a sample display.)
Exiting from MegaRAID Configuration Utility
Press Esc in the TOP menu of MegaRAID Configuration Utility.
When a confirmation message appears, select [Yes].
When the above message appears, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.
The server is rebooted.
Menu Tree
Setting list
+: Selection/execution parameter : Setting parameter. •: Information display
>: Can be set (modified) after creation of logical drive, #: Cannot be executed
Menu
Description
+Configure
Performs Configuration settings
Set configuration (Using fixed value)
Set new configuration
+Easy Configuration
+New Configuration
+View/Add Configuration
+Clear Configuration
Additional setting / viewing configuration
Clear configuration
+Specify Bootable Logical Drive
+Initialize
+Objects
Chose Bootable Logical Drive
Initialize logical drive
Various settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-32
Menu
Description
+Adapter
+Clear Configuration
Set disk array controller
Clear configuration
*1 FlexRAID PowerFail
*2 Fast Initialization
*3 Disk Spin up Timing
*4 Cache Flush Timing
*5 Rebuild Rate
Set whether to restart after rebuilding
Set high-speed initialization
Set hard disk spin-up
Set cache flush timing
Set rebuild rate
*6 Alarm Control
Set alarm sound (ON / OFF)
Board information display (FW version, etc.)
+Other Adapter Information
FW type
• FW Supports
• FW Ver
FW version
BIOS version
Memory capacity
Board series NO.
Set default value
• BIOS Ver
• DRAM
• Adapter Type
+Factory Default
*7 Disable (Enable) BIOS
Set BIOS Enable / Disable
Battery information
+Battery Information
Existence of battery module
Existence of battery pack
Battery temperature
• Backup Module
• Battery Pack
• Temperature
Battery voltage
• Voltage
Set fast charging status
The number charge cycle
Clear battery charge counter
Adapter detailed options
• Fast Charging
• No of Cycles
+Reset Battery Charge Counter
+Other Adapter Options
*8 Emulation
*9 Auto Rebuild
• Initiator ID
Set control mode
Set auto rebuilding Enable / Disable
Indicate Initiator ID No.
*10 Cluster Mode
Set cluster mode
*11 Multiple PCI Delayed Trans
*12 Force Boot
*13 Coercion Algorithm
Abort BI & CC Activities
Set PCI bus bridge
Forced setting of configuration information(HDD)
Setting parameter for maximum hard disk capacity
Abort Background initialize or Check Consistency
*14 CC Restoration
*15 Temporary Offline RAID
+Logical Drive
Select CC Restoration mode
Set Temporary offline Enable / Disable
Logical drive operation
+Logical Drives
Select logical drive
+Initialize
Initialize logical drive
+Check Consistency
+View/Update Parameters
• RAID
Check logical drive redundancy
Display logical drive information
Display RAID level
Display logical drive capacity
• SIZE
Display stripe size
Set write mode
• Stripe SIZE
+√ Write Policy
Set read mode
+√ Read Policy
Set cache mode
+√ Cache Policy
Set virtual sizing Enable / Disable *Do not set to Enable
+√ FlexRAID Virtual Sizing
Display stripe size
• #Stripes
• State
+Physical Drive
+Physical Drive Selection Menu
+Rebuild
Display logical drive status
Physical drive menu
Physical drive operation
Perform rebuilding
+Format
+Make Online
Perform low level format
Set the disk online
*Do not use
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-33
Menu
Description
+Fail Drive
Set the disk offline
+Make HotSpare
+View Drive Information
• Device Type
Set as stand-by disk for auto rebuilding
Display hard disk information
Hard disk type
Hard disk capacity
• Capacity
Hard disk vender name
Hard disk model
• Vender ID
• Product ID
Hard disk revision
• Revision
SCSI standard
• SCSI Standard
• Media Errors
• Other Errors
Synchronous Negotiation
SCSI Command Q Tagging
The number of media errors
The number of other errors
SCSI synchronous negotiation
Set SCSI command Q Tag
Set channel
*16
*17
+Channel
+Channels
Chose SCSI channel
Set termination state
Set auto termination state
Set transfer rate
*18
*19
*20
Termination State
Enable Auto Termination
SCSI Transfer rate
+Format
+Rebuild
Perform low level format
Perform rebuilding
*Do not use
+Check Consistency
+Select Adapter
Perform logical drive redundancy check
Select disk array controller
* This menu item does not appear if no disk array controller is installed
in the computer.
Setting values
No.
*1
Setting parameter
FlexRAID PowerFail
Fast Initialization
Disk Spin-up Timing
Cache Flush Timing
Rebuild Rate
Alarm Control
Disable(Enable) BIOS
Emulation
Auto Rebuild
Cluster Mode
Multiple PCI Delayed Trans
Force Boot
Coercion Algorithm
CC Restoration
Temporary Offline RAID
Synchronous Negotiation
SCSI Command Q Tagging
Termination State
Enable Auto Termination
SCSI Transfer rate
Factory setting
ENABLED
ON
2 disks every 6 secs
Every 4 Seconds
30%
Disable Alarm
Enable (Display: Disable BIOS)
MASS STORAGE
ENABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
ON
NONE
ENABLED
Setting change
Do not change
Variable setting
Do not change
Do not change
Variable setting
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Variable setting
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
*10
*11
*12
*13
*14
*15
*16
*17
*18
*19
*20
ENABLED
Enabled
Enhanced QTAG Scheduling
Enabled
No
320M
Changing factory settings
The settings for the following items can be changed. Follow each explanation:
*2 Fast Initialization
A setting of "On" is recommended.
This initializes the top area of the disk only.
A setting of "30%" is recommended.
Factory setting is "ENABLED".
*5 Rebuild Rate
*14 CC Restoration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-34
IMPORTANT:
Notice status display of "Disable (Enable) BIOS".
Selected Enable : Indicate "Disable BIOS"
Selected Disable: Indicate "Enable BIOS"
When "Factory Default" is executed, the setting values are changed.
Set each parameter after executing "Factory Default."
Some versions of MegaRAID Configuration Utility change the "Factory Default"
setting value.
Check each parameter setting after executing "Factory Default."
The server must be restart after executing "Factory Default."
Operating Procedures for Configuration Utility
Creating/adding configuration
Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility
Set new configuration information (pack/logical drive settings)
Check the logical drive settings
Initialize logical drive
Exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility
Procedures
1. Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility to check each setting parameter.
2. Select "Configure" → "New Configuration" from the TOP menu (Management Menu).
Select "View/add Configuration" to add configuration.
IMPORTANT:
When a new configuration is created by selecting "New Configuration," the existing
configuration information is cleared. To add configuration information to that existing,
select "View/add Configuration."
"Easy Configuration" cannot set logical drive capacity or create SPANNING OF RAID1.
Select "New Configuration" or "View/add Configuration" to execute these.
3. When a confirmation message (Proceed?) is displayed, select "Yes."
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-35
4. When SCAN DEVICE is started (scanning information is displayed at the bottom of the screen) and ends, the
"New Configuration - ARRAY SELECTION MENU" screen appears.
5. Move the cursor onto the hard disk to be packed by using cursor key and then press Space to select the hard
disk. (The display for the selected hard disk changes from READY to ONLIN and Axx-xx blinks.)
IMPORTANT: The channel number displayed on MegaRAID Configuration Utility is
different form hardware channel number printed on the controller board.
Channel number printed on the board
CH0
CH1
Channel number displayed on MCU Channel-1 Channel-2
6. When the hard disk is selected, press Enter to fix the selection (blinking stops.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-36
7. Press F10 to create logical drive. The "Logical Drives Configure" screen appears.
8. Select "RAID," "Size" or "Advanced Menu" by using cursor keys. Then press Enter to fix the selection and
set each value. Selecting "Advanced" displays the Advanced screen.
– "RAID": Sets RAID level.
Parameter
Remarks
0
1
5
-
-
-
The selectable RAID level varies depending on the number of hard disks that configure a pack.
– "Size": Sets logical drive size.
Up to 40 logical drives can be created per disk array controller.
– "Advanced Menu"
(a) "Stripe Size": Sets stripe size.
Parameter
Remarks
248
16
–
–
32
–
64
Default display: recommended set value
128
(b) "Write Policy": Sets write policy.
Parameter
WRTHRU
WRBACK
Remarks
Write through
Write back (Default display)
(c) "Read Policy": Sets read policy.
Parameter
Remarks
NORMAL
Does not perform read ahead.
Default display: recommended set value
Read ahead
Performs read ahead when sequential
sectors are accessed twice
consecutively.
READAHEAD
ADAPTIVE
(d) "Cache Policy": Sets cache policy.
Parameter
Remarks
Cached IO
Caches the data read from a hard disk
and then transfers it to the server.
Direct IO
Default display: recommended set value
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-37
(e) "Span": Sets Span.
Parameter
CANSPAN
NOSPAN
Remarks
SPAN=YES
SPAN=NO
When SPAN setting is available for the hard disk configuration of the pack, "YES" is displayed by
default.
When performing SPAN, create 2 or more sets of the same pack at pack creation. (For SPANNING
OF RAID1 creation; refer to "Setting SPAN" described later for detailed procedures.)
SPANNING
SPANNING
9. When all settings are completed, select "Accept" and then press Enter to create logical drive. The created
logical drive is displayed in the "Logical Drive Configured" screen.
10. After creating logical drive, press Esc to close the screen. Go back to the "Save Configuration?" screen and
then select "Yes" to save the configuration.
11. When the confirmation message shows that the configuration was saved, press Esc to return to the TOP menu
screen.
12. In the TOP menu screen, select "Objects" → "Logical Drive" → "View/Add Parameters" to check logical
drive information. Setting values for "Write Policy," "Read Policy" and "Cache Policy" can be changed.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to check that " FlexRAID Virtual Sizing" is set to "DISABLED."
Do not set it to "ENABLED."
The virtual sizing function shows the operating system a large disk capacity virtually.
Improper operation thus may disable operating system installation or disk capacity
allocation.
13. Select "Initialize" in the TOP menu screen.
14. The "Logical Drives" screen appears to select the logical drive to be initialized. Pressing F2 selects all logical
drives displayed.
15. After selecting logical drive, press F10 to start initialization. A confirmation screen for execution appears.
Select "Yes" to start initialization.
16. When the meter display in the "Initialize Logical Drive Progress" screen indicates 100%, initialization is
completed.
17. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-38
Manual rebuilding
Replace hard disk
Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility
Execute rebuilding
Exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility
Procedures
1. Replace a hard disk and turn on the controller.
2. Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility to check each setting parameter.
3. Select "Rebuild" from the TOP menu to display the "Rebuild – PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU"
screen shown below.
4. Move the cursor onto the hard disk displaying "FAIL," and then press Space to select it.
Multiple hard disks can be selected (simultaneous rebuilding.)
5. The "FAIL" display for the hard disk selected starts blinking.
6. When hard disk selection is completed, press F10 to start rebuilding.
7. A confirmation screen for execution appears. Select "Yes" to start rebuilding.
8. When the meter display in the "Rebuild Physical Drives in Progress" screen indicates 100%, rebuilding is
completed.
9. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-39
Setting hot spare
Install a hard disk
Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility
Check/set parameters
Exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility
Procedure
1. Install a hard disk to be used as hot spare, and then turn the server on.
2. Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility to check each setting parameter.
3. Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" from the TOP menu to display the "Objects - PHYSICAL DRIVE
SELECTION MENU" screen shown below.
4. Move the cursor onto the hard disk to be used as hot spare and press Enter.
5. The "Channel X,Target X" screen appears. Select "Make HotSpare."
6. A confirmation screen appears. Select "Yes."
7. The hard disk display is changed to "HOTSP."
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-40
8. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility.
NOTES:
Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" → "Fail Drive" to cancel the hot spare setting.
When there are 2 or more hard disks (of the same capacity) set as hot spare, rebuilding
is performed in order starting from the one with the smaller CH number/ID number.
Checking consistency
Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility
Perform consistency check
Exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility
Procedure
1. Start MegaRAID Configuration Utility.
2. Select "Check Consistency" from the TOP menu.
3. The "Logical Drives" screen appears. To run the consistency check, move the cursor onto the logical drive and
press Space to select it. Pressing F2 selects all logical drives.
4. When logical drive selection is completed, press F10 to start consistency check.
A confirmation screen for execution appears. Select "Yes" to start consistency check.
5. When the meter display in the "Check Consistency Progress" screen indicates 100%, the consistency check is
completed.
6. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit MegaRAID Configuration Utility.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to perform consistency check after creating configuration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-41
Setting SPAN
The setting procedure for SPANNING OF RAID1 and SPANNING OF RAID5 are shown below
SPANNING OF RAID1
1. Open the configuration creation screen.
Select "Configure" → "New Configuration" from the TOP menu to display the screen shown below. This is
the Channel-1 menu screen where the cursor is put on ID=0 position:
2. Select ID-0/1 hard disks.
Pressing Space changes the display for Channel-1, ID=0 to "ONLIN A01-01" where "A01-01" is blinking.
(The cursor automatically moves to Channel-1, ID=1.) In the same way, press Space on Channel-1, ID=1.
(Where "A01-02" is blinking, the cursor moves to Channel-1, ID=2.) After selecting 2 hard disks (Channel-1,
ID=0/Channel-1, ID=1), press Enter to determine the settings. (Display on each hard disk stops blinking.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-42
3. Select ID-2/3 hard disks.
Same as for Channel-1 for ID-0/1, press Space in the status described in 2 to select Channel-1 for ID-2/3 and
then press Enter to determine the selection. ("ONLIN A02-01/02" is then displayed.)
4. Set logical drive.
Pressing F10 in the status described in 3 displays a screen shown below. Set each item. Then select "Advance
Menu" to display the "Advanced" sub menu screen.
The setting contents are shown below:
Setting item
RAID
Default (initial value)
1
Setting range
0, 1
Size
Advanced
Full capacity (logical drive)
64 KB
WRBACK
Full capacity
2/4/8/16/32/64/128
WRTHRU
Stripe Size
Write Policy
WRBACK
Read Policy
Cache Policy
NORMAL
NORMAL
READAHEAD
ADAPTIVE
Direct IO
Cache IO
CANSPAN (YES)
NOSPAN (NO)
Direct IO
YES
Span
– To open the "Advanced" sub menu screen from the "Logical Drive XX" menu screen, select "Advanced
Menu" and then press Enter. Press Esc to move to the "Logical Drive XX" menu screen. In this case, the
cursor moves to "Accept."
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-43
– When creating SPANNING OF RAID1 system, set logical drive size to full capacity. SPAN setting is
disabled when the logical drive size is changed.
5. Fix the settings
After settings explained in 4 are completed, select "Accept" in the "Logical Drive X" screen and then press
Enter to fix the settings. When settings are fixed, logical drive display in the "Logical Drive Configured"
screen changes from green (not fixed) to light blue (fixed). The display color for the drive reveals whether a
setting is fixed or not.
To change the determined settings, press Esc to display the "Save Configuration?" screen and select "No."
Start over from "New Configuration."
6. Save the settings
After fixing the settings in 5, press Esc or Enter. The "Save Configuration?" screen appears.
Select "YES" and press Enter.
After saving is completed, a pop-up window displays a save completion message. Press any key to return to
the "Configure" screen. This completes the SPANNING OF RAID1 logical drive creation procedure.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to perform "Initialize" and "Check Consistency" after logical
drive creation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-44
SPANNING OF RAID5
1. Open the configuration creation screen.
Select "Configure" → "New Configuration" from the TOP menu to display the screen shown below. This is
the Channel-1 menu screen where the cursor is put on ID=0 position:
2. Select ID-0/1/2 hard disks.
Pressing Space changes the display for Channel-1, ID=0 to "ONLIN A01-01" where "A01-01" is blinking.
(The cursor automatically moves to Channel-1, ID=1.) In the same way, press Space on Channel-1, ID=1.
(Where "A01-02" is blinking, the cursor moves to Channel-1, ID=2.) In the same way, press Space on
Channel-1, ID=2. (Where "A01-03" is blinking, the cursor moves to Channel-1, ID=3.) After selecting 3 hard
disks (Channel-1, ID=0/Channel-1, ID=1/Channel-1, ID=2), press Enter to determine the settings. (Display
on each hard disk stops blinking.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-45
3. Select ID-3/4/5 hard disks
Same as for Channel for ID-0/1/2, press Space in the status described in 3 to select Channel for ID-3/4/5 and
then press Enter to determine the selection. ("ONLIN A02-01/02/03" is then displayed.)
4. Set logical drive
Pressing F10 in the status described in 3 displays a screen shown below. Set each item. Then select "Advance
Menu" to display the "Advanced" sub menu screen.
The setting contents are shown below:
Setting item
RAID
Default (initial value)
5
Setting range
0, 5
Size
Advanced
Full capacity (logical drive)
64 KB
WRBACK
Full capacity
2/4/8/16/32/64/128
WRTHRU
Stripe Size
Write Policy
WRBACK
Read Policy
Cache Policy
NORMAL
NORMAL
READAHEAD
ADAPTIVE
DirectIO
CacheIO
CANSPAN (YES)
NOSPAN (NO)
DirectIO
YES
Span
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-46
– To open the "Advanced" sub menu screen from the "Logical Drive XX" menu screen, select "Advanced
Menu" and then press Enter. Press Esc to move to the "Logical Drive XX" menu screen. In this case, the
cursor moves to "Accept."
– When creating SPANNING OF RAID5 system, set logical drive size to full capacity. SPAN setting is
disabled when the logical drive size is changed.
5. Fix the settings.
After settings explained in 6 are completed, select "Accept" in the "Logical Drive X" screen and then press
Enter to fix the settings. When settings are fixed, logical drive display in the "Logical Drive Configured"
screen changes from green (not fixed) to light blue (fixed). The display color for the drive reveals whether a
setting is fixed or not.
To change the determined settings, press Esc to display the "Save Configuration?" screen and select "No."
Start over from "New Configuration."
6. Save the settings.
After fixing the settings in 5, press Esc or Enter. The "Save Configuration?" screen appears.
Select "YES" and press Enter.
After saving is completed, a pop-up window displays a save completion message. Press any key to return to
the "Configure" screen. This completes the SPANNING OF RAID5 logical drive creation procedure.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to perform "Initialize" and "Check Consistency" after logical
drive creation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-47
Others
1. Select Adapter.
This menu item appears only if more than one MegaRAID host adapter is installed in the computer. Each
configuration is executed in increments of controller. Number of adapter is defined by PCI slot location.
2. Clear Configuration.
Clears configuration information.
Select "Configure" → "Clear Configuration" from the TOP menu.
All configuration information on the disk array controller and hard disks is cleared when this function is
executed.
Configuration information on all channels of the disk array controller is also cleared with this function.
NOTES:
When configuration information on the disk array controller and the hard disk do not
match (excluding at replacement of faulty disk array controller), configuration cannot
be performed by selecting the configuration information on the disk array controller. In
this case, perform "Clear Configuration" to create configuration again.
MegaRAID Configuration Utility cannot delete each logical drive. Use Power Console
Plus.
3. Make Online.
Puts a hard disk in the FAIL status online.
Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" → (select hard disk) → "Make Online" from the TOP menu.
4. Battery
– Indicate battery information
Select "Objects" → "Adapter" → "Battery Information" from the top menu.
Backup Module
PRESENT
ABSENT
PRESENT
ABSENT
GOOD
Battery Pack
Temperature
HIGH
Voltage
GOOD
LOW
Fast Charging
COMPLETED
IN_PROGRESS
***
No of Cycle
– Clear battery charge counter
Select "Objects" → "Adapter" → "Reset Battery Charge Counter" from the top menu. Popup message
appears. Select "Yes" and press Enter.
NOTES:
Clear Battery Charge Counter when you exchange the battery.
The battery backup module must be replaced every two years or 500 times of charge
and discharge.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-48
5. Rebuild Rate
Sets rebuild rate.
Select "Objects" → "Adapter" → "Rebuild Rate" from the TOP menu.
Can be set in a range from 0% to 100%. The default value (recommended setting value) is "30%."
6. Hard disk information
Checks hard disk information.
Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" → (select disk) → "View Drive Information" from the TOP menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-49
REMOTE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
Remote Management Function enables your system to monitor the status of power supply unit, fan and temperature of
servers by BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) and a remote KVM (Keyboard, Video, Mouse) console feature by
communicating through a management LAN PORT feature.
NOTE: The screen which can be displayed by the remote KVM side becomes resolution
1024x768 and less than refresh rate 75Hz.
Since a screen is not displayed by remote PC when a setup beyond this is performed, please
set it as less than this.
Moreover, if many numbers of colours of a screen are set up, an exact colour may be unable
to be displayed by remote PC.
When your server is connected to the network where broadcasting occurs frequently, the
performance about remote control may be affected.
Default Network Settings
When linking the management LAN port at the rear of the server to a network, refer to the following for default
settings.
IP Address : 192.168.1.1
User Name : administrator
Password
: (None)
Host Name : ARMCXXXXXXXXXXXX
Using a DHCP function, the host name in the case of performing automatic registration to a DNS server turns
into the above-mentioned host name.
Host Name: ARMCXXXXXXXXXXXX, where the 12 Xs are the MAC address of the Management Card.
When you link without a DHCP server, please access the above-mentioned IP address in the local network
which can use a default IP address "192.168.1.1."
NOTE: For security reasons, change these default settings (Password, an IP address, host
name) by your network environment. See "BMC Configuration" described later for the
setting method.
Server Setup
This section explains the operations which must be carried out on the server side, when using the Remote Management
Feature.
Initial Setup
To use the Web server feature, change settings as shown below.
Start the EXPRESSBUILDER from CD-ROM, and select [System Management] → [Set Advanced Remote
Management Card] from the Tools menu.
On the [Set Advanced Remote Management Card], select [Remote Management Console] → [Enabled], and then select
[Register].
IMPORTANT: For security, the Web server feature of BMC is disabled at the shipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-50
Setting of Graphics Accelerator Driver
When your server's operating system is Windows
Use the driver which is installed at initial setup by Express Setup or system update.
When a server's operating system is Linux
Since it may be automatic and a setup of a monitor/Driver/video memory may not be able to be performed by
composition when operating system is Linux. We recommend you to use it in text mode.
Setting of Mouse Properties
Clear the "Enhance pointer precision" check box in "Motion" in "Pointer Options" in "Mouse properties", when the
server operating system is Windows Server 2003.
Please adjust "Select a pointer speed", when you cannot move a mouse pointer up to the bottom right side of the host
server screen via the remote KVM console.
Configuring Management PC
This section provides information on what you need to do for management PCs and requirements of the browsers to
establish connection.
Setting Your Browser
Make the following settings.
Enable SSL.
Supported Browsers
The following browsers are supported.
Microsoft® Internet Explorer 6.0
Netscape 7.0
Mozilla 1.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-51
Java2 Runtime Environment
Java2 Runtime Environment, Standard Edition 1.4.2_04 or later, which you can download from the following, is
required.
http://java.sun.com/j2se/
If you access the login page without installing the product mentioned above, you may see a dialog box for security
warning. Read the message and take actions according to the message.
Using Remote Management Console
Overview
You can control power-on/off of a server and use Remote KVM Console from a web browser by using the web server
functions of BMC.
This function is achieved through Java Applet.
Connecting to the Web Server from a Web Browser on the Management PC
Access the following URL from the web browser in the management PC.
URL: http://BMC_HostPort/index.htm
NOTES:
"BMC_HostPort" is a colon and port number added after the BMC address or host name.
If the http port number is 80h (default), you can skip the port number.
When you use DHCP functions as well as performing auto registration to the DNS
server, the BMC default name is "ARMC"+MAC Address.
There is the MAC address on the Management Main Card.
IP address: 192.168.1.1
Default host name
User name: Administrator
Password : (none)
Host name: ARMC00004C9FXXXX
If you want to use the Remote Management Function with DHCP disabled, first use the
default IP address "192.168.1.1" and make access in a local network where this IP
address is available, and then adjust configurations such as IP address according to your
network environment. For information on configuration, see "BMC Configuration"
described later in this section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-52
When you use the Remote Management Function for the first time, you may see a dialogue box for security warning as
shown below. Read the message well and click either "Yes" or "Always." If you are not sure about the information,
select "No."
NOTE: When a connection is done with SSL, you may see some dialogue boxes for
security warning.
Login and Logout
Login
When the login page appears, enter the user name and password, and then click [Login].
If you are logging in for the first time, use the following default user name and password.
Default user name: administrator
Default password: None (enter no information)
IMPORTANT: Because no password is set by default, make sure to configure a password
immediately after you log in.
For security reasons, it is recommended to change the default user name as well.
For information on configuration and modification, see "BMC Configuration" described
later in this section.
When the password you entered is authorized, the following licensing agreement appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-53
Read the information well and click "Yes" If you cannot agree, click "No", and you will return to the login window.
Logout
To log out, select "Exit" on the File menu.
When you log out, the main window closes and the login window for the browser appears.
Main Window
1
2
4
3
1
2
3
4
File menu
The File menu allows you to quit this applet.
Window menu
The Window menu allows you to open various windows including Remote KVM Console window.
Main frame
Various windows open here.
Help menu
With the Help menu, you can check the version of the Remote Management Console.
Control Panel
You can use Control Panel to see server status and to control power-on/off.
Control Panel also starts up various windows including Remote KVM Console.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-54
Functions of Control Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 12 13
14
15
16
17 18 19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Shows the BMC host name.
Shows the server LCD.
Server power lamp that shows the server power-supply status.
Server power switch (provides the same function as achieved by pressing the server POWER switch)
Forcefully powers off the server.
Forcefully resets the server.
Starts up Remote KVM Console.
Starts up BMC Configuration.
Starts up Firmware Update.
10 Displays a user name.
11 Indicates status of connection with BMC.
12 Indicates status of communication security.
13 Indicates network access status.
14 Server status lamp that shows server status.
15 Makes the server collect memory dump (provides the same functionality as achieved by pressing the DUMP
switch in the server.)
16 Makes the server unit ID lamp flash.
17 Opens the window to show system event logs (SEL.)
18 Opens the window to show sensor data records (SDR).
19 Opens the window to show field replaceable unit (FRU) information.
20 Hides Control Panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-55
Remote KVM Console
By using Remote KVM Console functions of BMC, you can transfer local console of a server to the browser in the
management PC over network.
You can make full access from the management PC to the server by using video, keyboard and mouse.
NOTES:
The following five types of resolution are supported for a server.
– 1024×768
– 800×600
– 640×480
– 720×400
– 720×350
KVM is an acronym for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse.
Unlike using a conventional serial console remotely, KVM allows you to remotely use
graphics as they are.
The remote KVM console cannot be used for connection via proxy.
Starting Up Remote KVM Console
When you click [ ], the icon to start up Remote KVM Console, on Control Panel, the Remote KVM Console window
opens.
IMPORTANT: Never open Remote KVM Console if you have logged in BMC of the
local server from the local console of a server. Otherwise entry by keyboard or mouse
becomes disabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-56
Names of Components in the Remote KVM Console Window
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1, 2, 3, 4 Special key icon
5
6
7
8
9
Screen refresh icon
KVM properties icon
Zoom in icon
Zoom out icon
Default size icon
10 Window resize icon
11 KVM indicator
12 Remote KVM Console screen
IMPORTANT: When pressing Shift + CapsLock on the remote KVM console, the
indication may not be the same as the CapsLock LED on the management PC. In addition,
the CapsLock status on the management PC may change after the remote KVM console has
been used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-57
Entry via Special Keys
For special keys, even if you press these keys in a remote keyboard, it will not take effect in the host server. Using the
following three special key icons will take effect in the host server.
(raised state) and
(raised state) and
(pressed-in state): toggles whenever clicked.
(pressed-in state): toggles whenever clicked.
IMPORTANT: For example, to enter "Ctrl + Alt + Del", press the [CtrlAlt] icon and
press Delete on your keyboard. By doing so "Ctrl + Alt + Del" takes effect in the host
server. When this takes effect, click the [CtrlAlt] icon again to release the effect of entry of
this special key. If you press Delete on the keyboard while the [CtrlAlt] icon has been
selected, "Ctrl + Alt + Del" also takes effect in the host server.
(Windows key icon)
("|" pipe key icon)
Zoom In and Zoom Out
When you click [ ] to zoom in, what is shown becomes larger.
When you click [ ] to zoom out, what is shown becomes smaller.
When you click [ ], the default size icon, what is displayed will be the same size as the host server.
When you click [ ], the window resize icon, the size of the Remote KVM Console window is adjusted to the remote
screen size.
Screen Refresh
When you click [ ], the screen refresh icon, the Remote KVM Console screen will be refreshed. When the screen
display is disturbed, refresh the screen.
Modifying Properties
When you click [ ], the KVM properties icon, the KVM properties window appears. In this window, you can specify
the screen refresh interval which is executed automatically.
NOTE: By having a shorter refresh interval, garbage on the screen will be reduced.
However, note that screen refresh will give burden. A too short refresh interval can slow
response speed of terminals or affect traffic performance of the network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-58
IPMI Information
You can see system event logs (SEL), sensor data records (SDR), and field replaceable units (FRU) information, which
are called IPMI information. By using the IPMI information, you can see and examine troubles and events on the host
server, and determine a part to be replaced.
Displaying System Event Logs (SEL)
When you click [ ] to display system event logs (SEL) on Control Panel, SEL information is loaded from BMC, and
the following window showing system event logs (SEL) opens.
On the upper part of the window, a list of logs appears. On the lower part of the window, detailed information of the
entry selected from the list appears.
When you click [ ] for reloading, the SEL information is reloaded from BMC, and you can update the information to
latest.
Clearing SEL Information
You can clear the SEL information on BMC by clicking [ ], the icon for SEL clearing. When you see the message for
confirmation, click [Yes] if you want to clear SEL. If not, click [No] so that SEL clearing will not be performed.
Displaying Sensor Data Records (SDR)
When you click [ ] to display sensor data records on Control Panel, SDR information is loaded from BMC, and the
following window showing sensor data records appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-59
On the upper part of the window, a list of sensor data records appears. On the lower part of the window, detailed
information of the entry selected from the list appears.
NOTE: SDR information is information on definitions for each sensor on the server.
BMC monitors server sensors according to this information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-60
Displaying Field Replaceable Units (FRU) Information
When you click [ ] to display field replaceable units (FRU) information on Control Panel, FRU information is loaded
from BMC, and the following window showing field replaceable units (FRU) information appears.
On the upper part of the window, a list of FRUs appears. On the lower part of the window, detailed information of the
entry selected from the list appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-61
BMC Configuration
You can configure BMC settings.
Starting Up the BMC Configuration Window
When you click [ ], the icon to start up BMC Configuration on Control Panel, the BMC Configuration window
appears as shown below.
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Loads a file
Saves the file
Edits information
Reloads from BMC
Makes global settings of BMC
Item selection tree
Currently configured values
NOTE: Use "Global settings of BMC" when configuration information is loaded from a
file.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-62
User Configuration
By clicking [User Configuration] in the left pane of the BMC Configuration window, a list to show 20 accounts opens
in the right pane and you can set up user accounts.
Choose the account you want to modify or add and click [ ] to edit information. The User Configuration window to
edit a user account as shown below opens.
1
2
3
1
2
3
Enter a user name.
Enter a password. To avoid a mistake, enter the password in the two boxes.
Configure an access privilege.
Level :
Administrator: the user is allowed to do all operations.
User:
the user can see information but is not allowed modify settings.
Remote KVM Console: Specify whether or not to enable Remote KVM Console.
If you select this check box, you can make Remote KVM Console enabled (permit)
settings.
NOTE: You can make settings of Remote KVM Console regardless of the access privilege
levels. You can make "disable" settings for Administrator and "enable" settings for User.
When you click [OK], all the information in the User Configuration window will be written into BMC.
When you click [Cancel], the User Configuration window closes discarding what you have configured in the window.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-63
Network Configuration
By clicking [Network Configuration] in the left pane of the BMC Configuration window, you will see a window as
shown below and you can make network-related settings for BMC including IP address.
When you click [ ], the icon for editing information, in this window, the Network Configuration window as shown
below appears.
The Network Configuration window has three tabs.
1
2
3
1
2
3
The MAC address owned by BMC appears in this box.
Choose whether or not to acquire an IP address automatically by DHCP.
If DHCP is not used to automatically acquire an IP address, make settings here.
If DHCP is used, information automatically acquired appears here.
IMPORTANT: When you change the IP address, the current connection will be
disconnected after you click OK and settings of BMC is completed.
Close the window once, and then enter the IP address (or host name) that has been newly
configured in the browser to log in.
Because the login page that remains to be displayed in the browser has been accessed by
the old address, you cannot use it to log in.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-64
1
2
1
2
Choose whether or not to acquire the IP address of the DNS server automatically by
DHCP.
If DHCP is not used to automatically acquire the IP address of the DNS server, make
settings here. If DHCP is used, information automatically acquired appears here.
1
2
3
4
1
2
The default host name to be used when no host name is configured for using DHCP
Enter the host name of BMC. If nothing is set here, the default host name in the previous
step will be used.
3
4
Enter the domain name of the network to which BMC belongs.
Choose whether or not to register the host name to the DNS server.
NOTE: It is recommended to specify a name that is easy to imagine the host name in the
server operating system (for Windows, a computer name) for a BMC host name.
For example, if the host name on the server operating system is "sapphire", you may set
BMC "sapphire_bmc" for a BMC host name.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-65
IMPORTANT: Because BMC uses a LAN controller independent of the server operating
system, a BMC host name and a domain name cannot be exactly the same as those on the
server operating system. If BMC belongs to a different network domain, you can have the
same host name.
When you click [OK], all the information in the Network Configuration window with three tabs will be written into
BMC.
When you click [Cancel], the Network Configuration window closes discarding what you have configured.
HTTP Configuration
By clicking [HTTP Configuration] in the left pane of the BMC Configuration window, you will see a window as shown
below and you can make web server-related settings for BMC such as HTTP port.
IMPORTANT: If you change the settings of HTTP port number, Enable SSL, or SSL Port
Number, the current connection will be disconnected.
Close the window once, and then enter the port number that has been newly configured in
the browser to log in.
Because the login page that remains to be displayed in the browser has been accessed by
the old address, you cannot use it to log in.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-66
When you click [ ], the icon for editing information, in this window, the HTTP Configuration window as shown
below appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
Specify an HTTP port number
Choose enable/disable SSL communication. If you select this check box, you can make SSL
enabled settings. And, if you clear this check box, you can make SSL disabled settings.
NOTE: Unless there is any specific reason such use of SSL not being allowed, it is
recommended to use the HTTPS protocol, which is encrypted.
By default, SSL is disabled.
3
4
Specify an SSL port number in this box.
In Login attempt period, specify a time period during which you can retry login if your attempt
to log in has failed.
5
6
In Failed login attempts, specify the number of login attempts during the period specified in
the previous step, exceeding which prompts to deny login as specified in the following step.
In Account lock period, enter a time period during which login is denied.
NOTE: The three configuration items mentioned above are effective to deny unauthorized
login accesses that are attempted automatically. However, they cannot prevent such
accesses completely.
When you click [Default], default values for HTTP port number, SSL port number, Login attempt interval, Login
attempts, and Account lock interval appear. But, SSL Enable/Disable check box is not changed.
When you click [OK], all the information in the HTTP Configuration window will be written into BMC.
When you click [Cancel], the HTTP Configuration window closes discarding what you have configured in the window.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-67
Alert Mail Configuration
By clicking [Alert Main Configuration] in the left pane of the BMC Configuration window, you will see a window as
shown below and you can make alert mail-related settings.
When you click [ ], the icon for editing information, in this window, the Alert Mail Configuration window as shown
below appears. The Alert Mail Configuration window has four tabs.
1
2
3
1
2
3
You can choose to enable or disable alert mail functions. If you select this check box, you
can make mail-related settings.
Specify an alert level from six levels.
Alert levels are categorized according to severity of event causing an alert.
You can send a test mail by clicking the button in this box.
IMPORTANT: If you want to send a test mail, complete all alert mail settings detailed in
the following pages.
Note that entering information in the Alert Mail Configuration window does not complete
settings. When you have entered all the information you need to enter, click [OK], and the
information will be written into BMC and settings will be completed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-68
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Specify email addresses of alert mail. You can specify up to four addresses.
Specify the sender’s email address.
Type in the subject of the alert mail.
Type in a message that appears in the message body of all alert mails. If you do not need
such message, you can clear the check box. If you click "Acquire default message", the
recommended message appears.
NOTE: The subject and message you configure here will be attached to all alert mails.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-69
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Specify the SMTP server address. You can use the IP address as well.
Specify the port number of the SMTP server.
Specify how many retries can be made when attempt to send the mail has failed.
Specify a retry interval that waits for the next retry when attempt to send the mail has failed.
When you click [Default], default values for SMTP port number, retry count, and retry interval appear. Unless there is
any specific reason not to, it is recommended to use the default values.
1
2
1
Specify information to be included in the body of alert mails.
Product Information
IP Address
The product name, code and number of the server
IP address of BMC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-70
Event Time
The time the event occurred
SEL Dump Data
BMC URL
Data representing system event logs (SEL) in hexadecimal
URL of the ARMC login page
BMC FQDN
LCD Message
BMC FW Rev.
Full domain name of BMC
LCD message in the server at the time of event occurrence
Revision information of BMC firmware/SDR/PIA
2
The information here will appear in the Date field in the header of alert mails.
Firmware Update
You can update applet, KVM firmware, BMC firmware, sensor data records (SDR), and platform information (PIA)
Starting the Firmware Update Window
When you click [ ], the icon to start Firmware Update, on Control Panel, revision information is loaded from BMC,
and the Firmware Update window as shown below appears.
When you click [Cancel], the Firmware Update window closes without any changes made.
The following pages provide information about update procedures.
Loading Update Data Files
When you click [ ] to add update files, a window as shown below opens prompting you to select files.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-71
Select update data files.
When you click [Open] after selecting files, loading of the files begins.
It will take a little while for loading to be completed.
NOTE: Because update can be made globally for each update target, make sure to load
everything you need.
You can specify multiple files to be loaded simultaneously.
Checking Revisions
When loading of data files is completed, the current revision and new revisions appear with information on files (file
names and time stamps) in the Firmware Update window.
Check the revisions and information.
NOTE: Check each revision well because downgrade can be performed as well.
If you click [ ] to clear update data, all data that has been loaded will be discarded. If you
click [Cancel], the Firmware Update window closes discarding all information that has
been loaded.
Selecting Update Target
Select update targets in the Update check boxes.
NOTE: Only what you specify here will be written into BMC.
Data will not be written for those items with file loaded but not specified here.
IMPORTANT: If you want to update both SDR and PIA, perform writing simultaneously.
If you update SDR and PIA separately, the first update data will be cleared when the second
update is performed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-72
Writing Update Data into BMC
When you click [ ], update data will be written into BMC.
For each update target, the window showing update progress appears.
If any error is detected during update, an error message appears and the update is terminated.
Completion of Writing
When writing is completed, results appear in the [Status] column per [Target].
OK
OK
OK
NOTES:
For targets other than applet, reboot the server or power off and then on the server to
apply the update.
If you reboot the server or power on the server to apply the BMC firmware update,
connection to BMC is disconnected. To continue using, log in again.
To apply applet update, log out and shut down all browsers, and then log in again. You
do not need to reboot the server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-73
Troubleshooting
Error messages
Fatal errors
No
Error Message
What to do
1
2
Fatal error. JavaVM quits.
Try logging in again.
If the same message continues to appear, contact your service representative.
Try logging in again.
A fatal software error has
occurred.
If the same message continues to appear, contact your service representative.
Login error
No
Error Message
Authentication error
What to do
1
Check the user name and password, and then enter them again.
Access privilege error
No
Error Message
What to do
1
Unauthorized operation. You Try performing the operation with administrator’s privileges. Consult your
have no privilege to perform administrator.
the operation.
Network errors
No
Error Message
What to do
1
The HTTP communication
failed.
Check the network environment and try again. Contact your service
representative if the error persists.
2
3
4
5
Could not resolve the IP
address.
Unable to reach the target
host.
Check the network environment.
You cannot use Remote KVM Console for connections via proxy.
Check the network environment.
You cannot use Remote KVM Console for connections via proxy.
Check the network environment and try again. Contact your service
representative if the error persists.
Check the network environment and try again.
A network error occurred.
Failed to download applet.
When SSL has been enabled, more than one client cannot connect to the
network simultaneously. Try again after a connection from other client is
finished.
Contact your service representative if the error persists.
6
7
The RMCP+ session is
closed.
Failed to establish the
RMCP+ session.
Check the network environment.
If there is no network problem, contact your service representative.
Check the network environment.
If there is no network problem, contact your service representative.
8
The RMCP+ transmission
failed.
Check the network environment.
If there is no network problem, contact your service representative.
9
The specified RMCP+
Check the network environment.
protocol cannot be used.
If there is no network problem, contact your service representative.
10
BMC resources to establish
a new RMCP+ session are
insufficient.
Try again after a connection from other client is finished.
11
The RMCP+ session
time-out occurred.
Check the network environment and server.
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.
BMC-related errors
No
Error Message
What to do
1
The IPMI request was
aborted.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
2
3
Received bad response from
BMC.
BMC does not support IPMI
2.0 functions.
Check the server. A failure may have occurred in BMC.
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-74
No
Error Message
What to do
4
Failed to run the IPMI
command.
Check the server. A failure may have occurred in BMC.
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.
5
6
7
Failed to send the IPMI
message.
Illegal IPMI message was
requested.
Specified target is not present. Check the server. A failure may have occurred in BMC.
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.
Check the network environment.
If the network has no problem, contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative.
Remote KVM Console errors
No
Error Message
What to do
1
Failed to disable Remote KVM
Console.
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error persists.
2
3
Failed to enable Remote KVM
Console.
KVM packet transmission failed.
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error persists.
Check the network environment and server.
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.
4
5
The KVM request was aborted.
UDP packet transmission failed.
This is not a problem. Click OK and close the message box.
Check the network environment and server.
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.
6
7
Remote KVM console can not
activate because it is disabled.
Make a remote KVM console enable.
See "Remote KVM Console" in Chapter 4.
Try again after the client has finished using Remote KVM Console.
Remote KVM Console is used by
other client.
8
Failed to shut down Remote KVM
Console.
Use Remote KVM Console after waiting 3 or more minutes.
9
Failed to make settings.
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error persists.
10
The UDP connection is closed.
Check the network environment and server.
If you do not find any problem, contact your service representative.
System event logs (SEL) display errors
No
Error Message
What to do
1
Failed to clear session event logs
of BMC.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
2
Failed to acquire system event
logs.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Sensor data records (SDR) display error
No
Error Message
What to do
1
Failed to acquire sensor data
records.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Field replaceable unit (FRU) information display error
No
Error Message
What to do
1
Failed to acquire field replaceable
units information.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
BMC configuration errors
No
Error Message
What to do
1
Failed to make settings:
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error persists.
2
3
4
Failed to acquire BMC
Configuration:
Used by other software program.
Try again after a while.
Try again after a while.
Invalid BMC configuration file.
The BMC configuration file may be corrupted. Check the file.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-75
No
Error Message
What to do
5
The required XML tag is not
found.
The BMC configuration file may be corrupted. Check the file.
6
7
Failed to write the file.
The BMC configuration file is not saved successfully. Change the
location to save the file and try again.
You can use only alphanumeric characters, minus sign (–), and
Invalid user name
underscore (_) for a user name. A user name should be 32 characters or
less.
8
9
10
11
12
13
The user name is too long
The password is too long.
Passwords are not matched.
Invalid HTTP port number
Invalid SSL port number
A user name should be 32 characters or less.
Use 16 or less characters.
Again, input passwords.
You can use only numeric values.
You can use only numeric values.
HTTP/SSL should not be the
same.
The same port number cannot do them. Specify different value.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Invalid login attempt period
Invalid failed login attempts
Invalid account lock period
Invalid IP address
You can use only numeric values.
You can use only numeric values.
You can use only numeric values.
Use numerals and periods to specify an IP address.
Use numerals and periods to specify a subnet mask.
Use numerals and periods to specify a default gateway.
Use numerals and periods to specify the IP address of DNS server.
You can use only alphanumeric characters, minus sign (–), and
underscore (_) for a host name. A host name should be 64 characters or
less.
Invalid subnet mask
Invalid default gateway
Invalid DNS server IP address
Invalid host name
22
23
Invalid domain name
You can use only alphanumeric characters, minus sign (–), and
underscore (_) for a domain name. A domain name should be up to 256
characters.
The SMTP server address is too
long.
Specify within 256 characters.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Invalid SMTP port number.
Invalid retry count
Invalid retry interval
"To" is too long.
You can use only numeric values.
You can use only numeric values.
You can use only numeric values.
Specify within 256 characters.
Specify within 256 characters.
Specify within 512 characters.
The message should be up to 4064 characters.
The specified file may not exist. Check the file name.
The specified file may be corrupted.
The specified file may not exist. Check the file name.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
"From" is too long.
"Subject" is too long.
The message is too long.
Failed to open the file:
Failed to close the file:
Can’t open the file:
Timeout has occurred.
Firmware update errors
No
Error Message
What to do
1
There are uncompleted update
images on BMC as follows:
Reboot the server and complete the update.
2
Failed to acquire status of the
update area.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
3
4
Update data is too large:
Failed to prepare update
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
5
6
Invalid file size:
Could not find the revision
information:
The update file may be corrupted. Acquire the update file again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
7
8
9
Failed to create rollback image.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Failed to erase.
Unsupported format version:
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-76
No
Error Message
What to do
10
Failed to load the update image
file.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Update has failed.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Some update files may be corrupted.
Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted.
Acquire update files again.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Some update files may be corrupted.
Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted.
Acquire update files again.
Could not switch to the update
mode.
Could not find the update targets:
Invalid address:
Writing has failed.
Unsupported token is detected:
Invalid segment information:
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Invalid data length:
Failed to open the file:
Failed to close the file:
Invalid file checksum:
Failed to parse files.
Failed to parse files:
Failed to load files:
Could not find files:
Failed to verify
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
The specified file may not exist. Check the file name.
The specified file may be corrupted.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
27
28
29
Update will be stopped because
interruption has occurred.
Online update is now being used.
Check clients. A software program other than you are using may have
interrupted.
Try again as necessary after online update performed by other tool is
completed.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Failed to acquire the current
revision.
30
31
32
33
34
Failed to acquire lines:
Invalid line length:
Unexpected EOF is detected:
Unexpected token is detected:
PIA does not suit this server.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
It is not Platform Information (PIA) of this server. Acquire update files
again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-77
CONFIGURING I/O BOARD JUMPERS
With the pre-installed SETUP utility, you can set desired passwords to protect the data stored in the server against
access from unauthorized users. When you forget the passwords, however, you may want clear them. The following
describes how to clear these passwords. You can also use the following procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server.
IMPORTANT: Clearing the CMOS data resumes the factory-set configuration data.
To clear passwords or the CMOS data, use the jumper switch on the I/O board of the server.
The following describe the clearing procedure.
WARNING
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the server on any occasion other than described
in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may cause an electric shock or fire as well as
malfunctions of the server.
1. Record the current BIOS settings.
2. Power off the server and unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the rear access cover from the server (see Chapter 9).
4. Remove the processor access cover from the server (see Chapter 9).
5. Change the desired jumper switch setting.
IMPORTANT:
Do not change any other switch settings. Any change may cause the server to fail or
malfunction.
Use the clip over jumper pins (pins 1 and 2) on the I/O board.
Do not lose the clip.
The following figure illustrates the jumper switch location.
Pins for protecting/clearing
the passwords.
Jumper clip
Pins for
protecting/clearing the
CMOS data.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-78
Pins for protecting/clearing the passwords
Short-circuit these two pins to clear the passwords.
Open these two pins to protect the passwords (factory-set).
Pins for protecting/clearing the CMOS data
Short-circuit these two pins to clear the CMOS data.
Open these two pins to protect the CMOS data (factory-set).
6. Reassemble the server and press the POWER switch.
7. When the POST screen appears, power off the server and unplug the power cord.
8. Restore the jumper switch setting.
NOTE: Place the clip over the jumper pins 11 and 12 after use to keep the pin. Placing the
clip over any other pins may cause malfunction of the server.
Pins 11 and 12
9. Reassemble the server and press the POWER switch.
10. Run BIOS setup utility and restore the parameter settings recorded in Step 1.
If you have cleared the password, set it again as needed.
11. Save and exit the utility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
This section describes information on using Express Setup to install and configure the following operating systems to
the server.
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003
To use the server with another operating system than described in this section, contact your service representative.
IMPORTANT: Before installing the operating system, adjust the system date and time by
using the BIOS set up utility "SETUP." See Chapter 4 for detail.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
About Express Setup
"Express Setup" contained in your EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM is intended for initial setup of the server. Its
automatic installation mode guides the user easily through the process by detailing specific hardware features and
providing screen prompts for software selection and configuration. The program loads the utilities and drivers, applies
RAID settings, partitions the disk, and installs the desired operating system.
IMPORTANT: Executing the Express Setup erases all data on the hard disk.
For Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 and Windows® 2000, Express Setup automatically configures your server and
installs the operating system. After a few tasks are completed, all that remains to be done is to remove the
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and insert the Windows CD-ROM, input a product ID number, and acknowledge the
license agreement.
For the other operating systems, Express Setup initializes the target disk(s), creates the maintenance partition, and
installs the various maintenance utilities from the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to lead your server to ready-to-install
for the desired operating system.
You can also use "Configuration disk" at "Express Setup" in order to save or backup parameters for installation.
The Configuration disk is able to have has some parameter files that include the configuration information for the server
setup.
If you want to set up the server as before, execute the Express Setup with the parameter file you have saved before.
NOTES:
The parameters file is not mandatory to set up the system.
If you want to create a parameters file, have a blank floppy disk (MS-DOS 1.44 MB
format) ready.
If you want to use the drivers located on the "OEM-Disk for Mass Storage Device"
that ships with optional boards, a parameters file is mandatory.
You can create a parameters file in advance using "Configuration Diskette Creator"
included in EXPRESSBUILDER.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-3
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003
This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 in the server. Read instruction
in this section before proceeding the installation.
NOTES:
Express Setup does not support the installation of Windows Server™ x64 Editions. If
you want to install it, see Appendix D.
If you install Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup, see Appendix E.
Installation Notice
This section explains precautions and matters you should be aware of before beginning installation in order to install
Windows Server 2003 correctly.
Supported operating system on this model
The server supports the following edition:
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition
(Described as "Windows Server 2003" from now on.)
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise Edition
(Described as "Windows Server 2003" from now on.)
On installing other operating system, contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative.
BIOS Specification
Before installing Windows Server 2003, confirm if the BIOS specification of the hardware is correct. See Chapter 4 to
specify them.
ESMPRO Agent
ESMPRO Agent requires installing the necras.sys driver on your Windows system.
If you install the Windows without using the Express Setup, run the Update Express5800 system in Master Control
Menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
Optional Board Supported by EXPRESSBUILDER
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards:
NOTE: If you want to install the other boards except ones listed below by using a driver
floppy disk ("OEM-FD for Mass storage device"), see "Exceptional setup" and "Installing
Optional Mass Storage Driver" of "Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6.
Supporting installation of operating system in EXPRESSBUILDER
– On Board RAID (Controller on the I/O board)
– SecuRAID 321 Disk Array Controller (SCSI 2ch)
Other optional boards
– Initio 101 SCSI Controller
– Adaptec 29320 SCSI Controller
– SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b 1 Disk Controller
IMPORTANT: If you want to set up for the SecuRAID 321, you cannot use "Express
Setup". See Appendix E, and set it up.
Windows Server 2003
Express Setup can install Windows Server 2003 operating system. However, note the following issue:
IMPORTANT:
Before starting the installation, complete all the process of adding the optional device
and the setup of Express server mainframe (BIOS and optional board specification)
A document for installing Windows Server 2003 is also attached to the other software
package which is sold separately, but refer to this document when you install Windows
Server 2003 on this model.
After completing Express Setup, see "Setup for Solving Problems" described later to
specify the settings for trouble recovery such as "Specifying Memory Dump".
Installing on the Mirrored Volume
If you want to install Windows Server 2003 on the volume that is mirrored using "Disk Management", invalid the
mirroring before operating the installation to set back to the basic disk, and valid the mirroring again after the
installation has completed.
Creating, invalid, delete mirror volume can be operated from "Disk Management" in "Computer Management".
Connecting MO Device
If you are installing Windows Server 2003 with MO device connected, the installation may not be completed normally.
In such case, disconnect the MO device and then re-install the system from the beginning.
Media such as DAT
During the operating system installation, do not attach the unnecessary media for operating system installation to the
system, such as DAT.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-5
Connecting Hard Disk
Connect the hard disk that operating system is not going to be installed on after installing the operating system.
NOTE: If you connect the N8103-81F board as a data disk, clear disk array controller's
configuration information before you perform the Express Setup. The process for clearing
configuration information is described in the manual attached to the N8103-81F board.
Creating Partition Size
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size + Application Size
Size necessary to install the system = 2900 MB
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size * 1.5
Dump File Size
Application Size
= Mounted Memory Size + 12 MB
= Required Size
IMPORTANT:
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug
information (memory dump). The paging file with initial size large enough to store the
dump file in the boot drive is required.
It may not be possible to collect correct debug information due to virtual memory
shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set a paging file size large enough for
the entire system.
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095 MB. If the
above paging file size exceeds 4095 MB, specify 4095 MB for the paging file size.
The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2 GB memory mounted is
'2048 MB + 12 MB'.
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary space to the partition
to install these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as
follows:
2900 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 12 MB) + Application Size = 4192 MB + Application Size
Re-installing to the hard disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk
You cannot re-install Windows Server 2003 with the current partition of the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk kept
remained.
If you want to keep the current partition remained, see Appendix E to re-install the system.
About maintenance partition (the area displayed as "MAINTE_P")
The maintenance partition for server maintenance is reserved in the head of Hard Disk Drive (a partition of
approximately 55 MB). This area is for saving some maintenance utilities. Do not delete the maintenance partition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-6
Setup Flow
This section visually describes Express Setup setup flow.
: Process that proceeds automatically
: Process that needs to input or select
Do you want to proceed the setup using the setup parameter file?
Yes
Read notes and restrictions
No
Confirmed
Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive
Confirmed
Confirmed
New File
(Select Setup Parameter File)
Existing File
Check Setup Parameter File
Correct
Skipped
Select whether or not to confirm/modify the setting
Confirmed
Disk Array Configuration Screen
Creating Maintenance Partition and Installing Utilities
Operating System Installation Menu
Create the OS partition after the reboot
Confirm Setup File Create New File
Select OS to install
No Floppy Disk
In case [Skip] is selected
Confirm the specification and input the value
Remove the Floppy Disk and CD-ROM
Copying NEC Modules
from the Drive
Insert Windows CD-ROM
Agree Software License Agreement
Install OS Automatically
↓
Copying Selected Application Modules
↓
Log on Automatically
After restarting the computer, the
installation is completed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-7
Installing Windows Server 2003
Express Setup proceeds to the setup by specifying the necessary information in the wizard. You can also save the setup
information created in the wizard on a floppy disk as a setup file.
NOTE: One floppy disk formatted by MS-DOS 1.44 MB is necessary to save the setup
information. Please prepare a floppy disk by yourself before the installation.
Using the same setup file you saved and used before allows you to omit specifying the
setup information in the wizard.
And if you use a floppy disk which is attached to the optional device such as disk array
controller and contains device driver to install optional mass storage driver while
processing the Express Setup, you have to save the setup information in the setup file.
Please prepare one empty floppy disk for setup file in this case, too.
1. Turn the power of peripheral devices on, and then turn on the server.
NOTES:
If you are installing Windows Server 2003 with an MO device connected, the
installation may not be completed normally. In such case, detach the MO device and
then re-install the system from the beginning.
Connect the hard disk drive that operating system is not going to be installed to after
installing operating system.
If you create multiple logical drives in your system, refer to "Reinstalling the operation
system when multiple logical drives exist" (Appendix E).
2. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
3. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may
also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and EXPRESSBUILDER starts.
4. Click [Express Setup].
5. The message, "Do you want to use the parameter file in order to set up the Express Server or Workstation",
will be displayed.
If you use the setup parameter file, click [Yes] and if you do not use the setup parameter file, click [No].
6. "Note" will be displayed. Read the instruction carefully and click [Confirm].
7. Notes and restrictions are displayed.
Read the messages carefully and click [Confirm].
NOTE: If some operating system has already been installed on the hard disk, a message
asking if you want to continue the installation appears.
If you wish to continue the installation, click [Continue].
8. If you selected "Yes" at step 5, place a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive mounted on the server.
If not, go to next step.
NOTE: If you set the floppy disk at this step, do not remove the floppy disk from the
server until the message as removing the floppy disk appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-8
[Using the existing Configuration Disk]
The parameters files in the floppy disk are listed in dialogue-box.
1) Select a parameters file to use in the Express Setup, and then click [Use].
After the parameters file is specified, the message "Do you want to review or modify the Setup File
parameters?" appears.
2) If you want to modify or confirm the parameters file, click [Review]. If not, click [Skip].
Click [Review] → Go to next step.
Click [Skip] → Go to step 10.
[Using a blank disk]
1) Click the box under [Setup File Name: (A)] or press A.
The dialog box appears.
2) Type the file name and click [Use].
9. Confirm or modify the parameters of disk array configuration.
[Configure RAID] screen appears. Confirm the specification, modify if necessary, and then click [OK].
NOTE: Choose RAID0 when you install it in one hard disk.
When the dialogue-box is closed, the Express setup automatically performs the RAID configuration, creating
Maintenance partition and installing several utilities.
10. Select the installing Operating system.
Select "Windows" from the menu.
11. Select the Windows family.
Select "Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition / Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise
edition" category.
NOTE: If you selected "Skip" at step 8, this menu does not appear, go to step 13.
12. Next, [Basic Information] wizard appears. Confirm the parameters, modify if necessary, and then click [Next].
After that, click [Next], [Back], or [Help] to continue. Modify the parameters each time necessary.
IMPORTANT:
Reserve the partition to install the operating system more than the minimally required
size.
If you select "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration", the
information included in the first partition (excluding maintenance partition) will all be
formatted and deleted. The information included in the other partition will be retained.
The figure below describes the partition which information will be deleted when
maintenance partition exists.
First Partition
<Maintenance Partition>
Retained
Second
Partition
Deleted
Third
Partition
Retained Retained
Fourth
Partition
You cannot re-install the system with the existing partition that is upgraded to
Dynamic Disk remained. Do not select "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID
Configuration".
If you specify other than 4095 MB for the "Installing Partition", it is necessary to
convert to NTFS.
If "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration" is selected but the
partition other than the one to install Windows Server 2003 does not exist (excluding
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-9
maintenance partition), Express Setup will reserve the maximum area of the hard disk
to install Windows Server 2003.
You cannot go to the next screen if the specification is incorrect.
On specification, an error may occur in relationship with the specified contents of the
former screen and require to go back to modify the specification.
During the setup, the screen to specify the partition that Windows Server 2003 is to be
installed appears. The first 55 MB area displayed on the screen is a partition that is
used to store the configuration information or utilities unique of the server. We do not
recommend to delete this area, but if you do not want to reserve this 55 MB area,
perform the installation by manual setup. It is not possible to delete this area by
Express Setup.
NOTES:
If you click [Cancel] in [Basic Information] screen, the screen will go back to select
the operating system. [Cancel] exists only in [Basic Information] screen.
If you click [OK] in [Role of Computer] screen, the setup automatically selects default
value for the later specification to continue the installation.
13. Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver.
If you want to install the optional mass storage driver, insert the floppy disk attached to mass storage driver
into the floppy disk drive and follow the message to perform the installation.
NOTE: You can use this function only when the floppy disk drive is attached to the
system.
14. Remove EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive according to the message.
If you proceed to the setup by using setup parameter file, remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive.
Insert Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
[Agree Software License Agreement] screen appears.
15. Read the contents carefully and click [I agree.] or press F8 if you do agree. If you do not agree, click [I
disagree] or press F3.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not agree to this agreement, the setup terminates and Windows Server 2003
will not be installed.
If "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" is specified to install, the window to
specify the details of "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" pops up on the first
logon. Specify the appropriate value.
Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-10
Installing and Setting Device Drivers
Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:
Confirm detailed information about the adapter.
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test, etc.
Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and
enhance throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to use these features.
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.
1. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3. Run "PROSET.EXE" in the following directory.
CD-ROM DriveLetter:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC5\PROSET\WS03XP32
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.
4. Click [Next].
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6. Choose "Typical" and click [Next].
7. Click [Install].
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
9. Restart the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-11
Network Driver
Specifying the details of network driver.
Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and Duplex mode
need to be specified manually.
[When PROSet is not installed]
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
1. Click Start menu, then [Control Panel], [Network Connections], and finally [Local Area Connection].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
1. Click Start menu, [Settings] and then [Network Connections].
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from the drop-down menu.
2. Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.
3. Click [Advanced] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
[When PROSet is installed]
1. The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel] and click [Intel PROSet].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
1. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].
2. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet] on the [Control Panel] window.
2. Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3. Click [Speed] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.
4. Click [Apply] and click [OK].
Specify the other network driver with the same process as above.
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from [Network
and Dial-up Connection].
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding Services]. [Network
Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet) that the computer installing [Network
Monitor] sends or receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For
information on how to install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving Problems" described
later in this chapter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-12
Optional Network Board Driver (INTEL PRO/1000 TX 64-BIT PCI / INTEL PRO/1000 F 64-BIT
PCI / 64B PCI-X PRO 1000MT DUAL)
If you want to use an optional Network Board, the network driver will be installed automatically.
Therefore, the driver attached to the Network board should not be used.
IMPORTANT: If you want to use optional Network Board INTEL PRO/1000 TX 64-BIT
PCI, open [Advanced] in PROSet window and change [Offload TCP Segmentation] value
to "Off".
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Initio 101 / Adaptec 29320)
If you use SCSI controller driver (Initio 101 / Adaptec 29320), install it according to the following procedure:
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer
Management].
2. Double-click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device.
3. Click [Update Driver].
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]"
and click [Next].
5. Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk..].
7. Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive, enter "a:\"
into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].
8. Specify the following driver and click [Next].
– [INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller](When Initio 101 board is installed.)
– [Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP - Ultra320 SCSI](When Adaptec 29320 board is installed.)
The installation of the driver is completed.
Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen.
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b 1)
If you use SCSI controller driver (SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b 1), update your system with EXPRESSBUILDER
CD-ROM attached to your system.
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-13
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321)
To additionally install the SecuRAID 321 in a system containing Windows Server 2003, connect the controller and
install the driver as follows:
1. When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, click [Next].
2. When the [Install Hardware Device Drivers] dialog box appears, select [Search for a suitable driver for my
device (Recommended)], and click [Next].
3. When the [Locate Driver Files] dialog box appears, select [Floppy disk drives], insert "Windows Server 2003
OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive, and click [Next].
4. When the [Driver Files Search Results] dialog box appears, click [Next].
5. Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completion of the new hardware detection wizard] dialog box
appears; click [Complete].
Graphics Accelerator Driver
Standard graphics accelerator drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically. The following is the procedure
when it is necessary to install manually.
If you want to use optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board, follow the document attached to the board to install the
driver.
1. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3. Run "SETUP.EXE" in the following directory.
<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\DOTNET\VIDEO\SETUP.EXE.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to continue the installation.
If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." appears, select [Yes] to continue.
5. Remove the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive, follow the on-screen instructions and
restart the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-14
Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini File.
Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot.ini file.
For the available switch options, refer to the following information:
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 833721
"Available switch options for the Windows XP and the Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini files"
If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4 GB in its installing, adding /PAE switch in Boot.ini file will enable
the system to be installed with over 4 GB of memory.
However, the Microsoft operating system products which support /PAE switch option are limited.
Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products.
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Aritcle ID: 291988
"A description of the 4 GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension switch"
Below is the example on how to add /PAE switch to Boot.ini file.
1. Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Control Panel].
2. In [Control Panel], double-click [System].
3. Click the [Advanced] tab, and then click [Settings] under [Setup and Recovery].
4. Under [System Setup], click [Edit] to open [Boot.ini].
5. Add "/PAE" to [Operating Systems] section in [Boot.ini] file, and then save it.
<Example of Boot.ini file>
[boot loader]
timeout=30
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS
[operating systems]
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server
2003, Standard" /fastdetect
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server
2003, Standard, PAE" /fastdetect /PAE
C:\CMDCONS\BOOTSECT.DAT="Microsoft Windows Recovery Console" /cmdcons
This is the end of editing Boot.ini file.
NOTE: If you choose one of the items in the "Default operating system" drop-down list
box in [Setup and Recovery] group box, you can make your system start automatically
from the switch you specified.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-15
Setting for Solving Problems
Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely and as soon as
possible when it should occur.
Memory Dump (Debug Information)
This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information) in the server.
IMPORTANT: Cautions for the Memory Dump
The staff of your maintenance service representative is in charge of collecting memory
dump. Customers need only to specify the memory dump.
If any trouble occurs after specifying the process below, the message to inform that the
system is in short of virtual memory may appear, but continue to start the system. If
you re-start the system in such case, memory dump may not be stored correctly.
Follow the procedure below to specify.
1. Select [Control Panel] and click [System].
The [System Properties] dialog box appears.
2. Select [Advanced] tab.
3. Click [Settings] on the [Startup and Recovery] group box.
IMPORTANT:
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Specifying "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug information is
recommended.
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2 GB, "Complete Memory Dump" cannot
be specified, in this case specify "Kernel Memory Dump" instead.
Specify a drive where there is a free area greater than the size of "the memory capacity
mounted on Express server + 1 MB".
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2 GB due to the added memory, change the
write debugging information to [Kernel Memory Dump] before adding memory. The
size of debugging information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to adding
memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information (memory
dump) write destination drive.
Windows Server 2003
Specifying "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug information is
recommended.
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2 GB, "Complete Memory Dump" cannot
be specified, in this case specify "Kernel Memory Dump" instead.
Specify a drive where there is a free area greater than the size of "the memory capacity
mounted on Express server + 12 MB".
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2 GB due to the added memory, change the
write debugging information to [Kernel Memory Dump] before adding memory. The
size of debugging information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to adding
memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information (memory
dump) write destination drive.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-16
4. Specify "Complete memory dump" and modify [Dump file:] in the
[Write debugging information] group box.
e.g. Write the debug information in D drive write the file name "MEMORY.DMP".
D:\MEMORY.DMP
5. Click [Settings] on the [Performance] group box.
The [Performance Options] window appears.
6. Click [Advanced] tab on the [Performance Options] window.
7. Click [Change] on the [Virtual memory] group box.
8. Modify [Initial Size] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] box to a value larger than [Recommended],
and click [Set].
IMPORTANT:
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug
information (memory dump). The paging file with initial size large enough to store the
dump file in the boot drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory
shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set the paging file size large enough
for the entire system.
For more information on "Recommended" value, see "Partition Size to be Created"
described earlier.
In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file to suit the new memory
size.
To prepare for the situation when any trouble occurred, we recommend you to press
dump switch to confirm that the dump will be collected normally in advance.
9. Click [OK].
The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification. In such case, follow
the message to restart the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-17
Windows Dr. Watson
Windows Dr. Watson is a debugger for application errors. If any application error is detected, Dr. Watson diagnoses the
server and logs diagnostic information (log). Follow the procedure below and specify Dr. Watson to collect diagnostic
information.
1. Click [Run] on Start menu.
2. Type "drwtsn32.exe" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].
The [Dr. Watson for Windows] dialog box appears.
3. Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the [Log File Path] box.
The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name "DRWTSN32.LOG".
NOTE: You cannot specify network path. Specify the path on local computer.
4. Specify the location of crash dump file in the [Crash Dump] box.
NOTE: "Crash Dump File" is a binary file that can be read with Windows Debugger.
5. Check the following check boxes on the [Option] box.
Dump Symbol Table
Dump All Thread Contexts
Add To Existing Log File
Create Crash Dump File
For more information on each function above, refer to Online Help.
6. Click [OK].
Network Monitor
Using Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage network troubles. To use Network Monitor, you need to
restart the system after the installation has completed, we recommend to install Network Monitor before any network
trouble may occur.
1. Point to [Settings] from Start menu and click [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.
2. Double-click [Add/Remove Programs].
The [Add/Remove Programs] dialog box appears.
3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Component].
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears.
4. Check the [Management and Monitoring Tools] check box of the component ON and click [Next].
5. If the setup asks to install the disk, insert Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into CD-ROM drive and click
[OK].
6. Click [Complete] in the [Windows Component Wizard] dialog box.
7. Click [Close] in the [Add/Remove Application] dialog box.
8. Close the [Control Panel] dialog box.
To start Network Monitor, point to [Program] → [Administrative Tools] and click [Network Monitor]. For information
on how to operate Network Monitor, refer to Online Help.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-18
Installing Maintenance Utilities
Various maintenance utilities are contained in your EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. See Chapter 6 for installing the
utilities to your server or management workstations.
Updating the System
Update the system in the situation below:
Processor is expanded (expanded from single processor to multi-processor).
Modified system configuration.
Recovered the system using recovery process.
Log on to the system with an account that has administrative authority (e.g. Administrator) and insert the
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
[Setup Software] in [Master Control Menu] screen appears, so left-click the item. Click [Update Express5800 System]
from the menu and the setup will start. After that, follow the message to continue the setup process.
Making Backup Copies of System Information
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server.
Save the information after completing the system setup.
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.
You can save the information by the following process.
1. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and reboot the system.
2. Select [Tools].
3. Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].
4. Select [System Information Management].
5. Set a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.
6. Select [Save].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-19
Exceptional Setup
This section explains how to setup by the exceptional way. You usually do not have to do as follows. The detailed
information is provided by the manual of the Mass Storage Device.
Installation of Mass Storage Device not Supported by ExpressSetup
If you would like to install or re-install the operating system when the system has new mass storage device not
supported by EXPRESSBUILDER, you have to set as follows.
1. Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting the server.
2. If the mass storage device is a disk array controller, configure the RAID system before running
EXPRESSBUILDER.
3. Boot the system from EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
4. (a) When the Disk Array Configuration dialog box appears, check "Use Existing Array".
(b) Check "Apply OEM-FD for Mass storage device".
5. Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the ExpressSetup.
Insert the floppy disk attached the mass storage device into the floppy disk drive.
Continue the ExpressSetup, referring to the on-screen messages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-20
This page is intentionally left blank
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Installing and Using Utilities
This section describes how to use the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with your server and to install the
utilities stored on the EXPRESSBUILDER.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
EXPRESSBUILDER
EXPRESSBUILDER is an automated software integration tool to help simplify the process of installing and
configuring your server. Shipped with all our servers, the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM provides a flexible, guided
installation process for system administrators to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows 2000 or
other operating systems (contact your service representative for the server certified operating systems).
NOTE: Before using EXPRESSBUILDER for initial setup, complete the hardware
configuration.
EXPRESSBUILDER includes three distinct programs. Two can be booted under DOS for initial setup, and one is for
use under Windows operating system.
DOS-based with local console
Used to set up the server at the first time. This program is also used to diagnose the server and to
install/uninstall the management utilities on the maintenance partition of the system drive.
DOS-based with remote console
Used to set up the server from the management workstation by accessing the server over the network or via
COM B (serial) port.
NOTE: No keyboard connected to the server is permitted to run this program.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-3
Windows-based
This program is called as "Master Control Menu" that can run under the Microsoft Windows system
(Windows 95 or later and Windows NT 4.0 or later). You can install the several applications and read the
documentation from the menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console
This subsection describes the procedures for using EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with local console.
Starting EXPRESSBUILDER
The following procedure instructs you to start EXPRESSBUILDER.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM while
EXPRESSBUILDER is running.
1. Turn on peripheral devices and the server in this order.
2. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM supplied with your server into the CD-ROM drive of your server.
3. Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty.
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may
also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
EXPRESSBUILDER boots up displaying the top menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-5
Express Setup
"Express Setup" is intended for initial setup of the server. Its automatic installation mode guides the user easily through
the process by detailing specific hardware features and providing screen prompts for software selection and
configuration. The program loads the utilities and drivers, applies RAID settings, partitions the disk, and installs the
desired operating system.
If you install Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000, after a few tasks are completed, all that remains to be done is to
remove the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and insert the Windows CD-ROM, input a product ID number, and
acknowledge the license agreement.
IMPORTANT:
Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the server system and, therefore,
Express Setup clears the contents of the hard disk.
When the setup is started, do not turn off the server until the setup is completed, and
also make sure not to remove the "Configuration Diskette" from the floppy disk drive
until the message that allow you to remove it appeared.
Tools
"Tools" is also intended for initial setup of the server. It provides more installation options than Express Setup and
permits the user to quickly create utility support disks, run the Off-line Maintenance Utility and system diagnostic
utility, set up a maintenance partition, and update the various BIOS programs.
Tools Menu
RAID Board: Present
Total Drives: 1
Drives in Group: 1
Hot Spares: 1
RAID Level: 7
Write Mode: WRITE_THRU
Maint Part: Present
Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data
Off-line Maintenance Utility
System Diagnostics
Create Support Disk
Setup Maintenance Partition
BIOS/FW/etc. Update
System Management
Help
Return to the Top Menu
Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data
The item allows the configuration information on the disk array system to be saved or restored from the
floppy disk.
– Save Disk Array Configuration Data
The configuration information on the disk array controller is saved into the floppy disk. If you set or
change RAID, always use this function to save the configuration information into a floppy disk.
– Restore Disk Array Configuration Data
The configuration information saved in a floppy disk is restored to NVRAM and hard disk on the disk
array controller.
If the configuration information is broken or changed by mistake, restore the configuration information.
When the defected disk array controller is replaced, the configuration information on the hard disk must
be saved into the disk array controller.
However, if the configuration information on the new disk array controller is saved into a hard disk, use
this function to restore the configuration information.
IMPORTANT: Some Disk Array Controllers do not support this function. In that case,
this menu will not be shown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6
Off-line Maintenance Utility
Off-line Maintenance Utility is an operating system independent maintenance program that performs
preventive maintenance and error analysis for your server. See Chapter 8 or online help for details.
System Diagnostics
System Diagnostics runs various tests on the server system to check if the server functions are normal and if
the connection between the server and additional board is normal.
After the System Diagnostics is run, a system check program assigned to each model starts. See Chapter 7 for
details.
Create Support Disk
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM contains a number of device drivers and utilities that you can put on floppy
disks and load onto your system.
Using this menu creates a support disk by copying from the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. If your system
has Windows operating system, you may find it more convenient to use EXPRESSBUILDER for
Windows-based to make support disks
Write the displayed title on the floppy disk label, which is useful for management in the future. Customers are
to provide a floppy disk to create a support disk.
– Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILER
Creates a support disk for installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.
– Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER
Creates a support disk for installing Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition and Windows Server 2003
Enterprise Edition. (No need to create this disk when installing the operating system with the Express
Setup.)
– Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER
Creates a support disk for installing Windows 2000 Server and Windows 2000 Advanced Server. (This
disk is used for Windows 2000 clean installation and for Recovery for Windows 2000 system.) (No need
to create this disk when installing the operating system with the Express Setup.)
– ROM-DOS Startup FD
Creates a support disk for starting the ROM-DOS system.
– Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD
Creates a support disk for activating the Off-line Maintenance Utility.
– System Management FD
Creates a support disk for activating the System Management.
Setup Maintenance Partition
Maintenance partition is a specific partition for the server and created on your system disk. About 55 MB of
the maintenance partition includes the various maintenance utilities and executable commands.
In this menu, you can create the maintenance partition, install the various utilities, and update the utilities. The
maintenance utilities installed in the maintenance partition are system diagnostics, System Management, and
Off-line Maintenance Utility.
IMPORTANT:
Do not reset or turn off the server while the running this menu. If the processing is
discontinued, the system becomes unable to start.
The existence of the maintenance partition may be identified from the operating
system. In order to retain the Configuration Data, do not delete the partition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-7
NOTES:
The maintenance partition, once created, will not be recreated again.
When the maintenance partition does not exist, some menu items do not appear.
– Create Maintenance Partition
EXPRESSBUILDER creates about 55 MB of the maintenance partition on the system disk (or disk array
system) as work area. The various utilities are installed when the maintenance partition is created
successfully or when the maintenance partition is already created.
– Install Maintenance Partition Utilities
Various utilities are installed in the maintenance partition from the CD-ROM.
– Maintenance Partition Update
Various utilities are copied in the Maintenance Partition from the update disk. This menu is only used
when the update disk is supplied from your service representative or attached with your system.
– FDISK
Execute FDISK command of ROM-DOS system. You can create/delete partitions, etc.
BIOS/FW/etc. Update
This menu allows you to update software modules such as BIOS and firmware of the server by using the
update disk (3.5-inch floppy disk) that is distributed from our customer service representative.
After rebooting the system, an update program is started automatically from the floppy disk, and the various
BIOS and firmware programs are updated.
IMPORTANT: Do not turn off the server while the update program is running. If the
update processing is discontinued, the system becomes unable to start.
System Management
The parameters of BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) are set for remote control and alert.
Help
Displays explanations about various functions of EXPRESSBUILDER.
Return to the Top Menu
Choosing this menu returns to the Top Menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console
This subsection describes the procedures for using EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with remote console.
EXPRESSBUILDER contains the remote console feature that allows the system administrator to set up the server from
the management workstation (management PC) via the network or the server's COM2 (serial) port.
IMPORTANT:
Do not use this feature on any other computer than the server, or on any other server
obtained without EXPRESSBUILDER. Doing so may cause a failure of the server.
When a keyboard is connected to the server, the remote console feature is disabled.
EXPRESSBUILDER determines that the server has a console. (Nothing is displayed
on the management PC.)
Starting
The following two methods are available to start the server.
Running EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via LAN
Running EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via direct connection (COM2)
For the procedure for starting EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console, see "DianaScope".
IMPORTANT: Do not change the boot device order in BOOT menu in BIOS SETUP.
EXPRESSBUILDER cannot be used if the CD-ROM drive is not the first device to launch
the system.
To use this feature, you need a 3.5-inch floppy disk. Please prepare a floppy disk.
NOTE: The following items of BIOS setup information will be set as shown below.
LAN Controller 1 (10/100): [Enabled]
Serial Port A:
Base I/O address:
Interrupt:
[Enabled]
[3F8]
[IRQ 4]
Serial Port B:
Base I/O address:
Interrupt:
[Enabled]
[2F8]
[IRQ 3]
Serial Port Address:
Baud Rate:
[On-board COM B]
[19.2k]
Flow Control:
Console Type:
[CTS/RTS]
[PC ANSI]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-9
Top Menu
Shown below are the top menu items.
Setup
Automatically sets up the server.
Tools
Launch the features of EXPRESSBUILDER individually.
Help
Help message on EXPRESSBUILDER.
Quit
Quit EXPRESSBUILDER.
Setup
The EXPRESSBUILDER checks the hardware configuration of the server. The disk array and maintenance partition are
automatically configured.
Tools
When you select the [Tools] on the Top Menu, the following screen appears.
The menu items available only in remote console operation among those described in section "EXPRESSBUILDER for
DOS-Based with Local Console" are displayed. See the previous subsection for detailed explanation of menu items.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-10
EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu)
The Master Control Menu is used to,
Read the User's Guide or the other documents,
Update the Express5800 system, and
Install the management software.
NOTES:
Master Control Menu requires Microsoft Windows 95 (or later) or Windows NT 4.0
(or later).
Some documents are provided in the PDF format. Use the Adobe Reader to view or
print these documents.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu appears on the screen automatically. If the CD-ROM Autorun function is invalid in your system,
run the \MC\1ST.EXE file in the CD-ROM directly.
Some items are greyed-out if the logon user does not have the administrator authority or the item is not proper for the
system.
To use Master Control Menu,
Click [Online Document],[Setup] or [Quit], or
Click the right mouse button on the Master Control Menu window.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-11
CONFIGURATION DISKETTE CREATOR
"Configuration Diskette Creator" is a tool to create [Configuration Diskette] that is used for configuring the server with
the Express Setup (see Chapter 5 for details).
If you use the Configuration Diskette created by the Express Setup and Configuration Diskette Creator to run the setup,
you can setup from the installation of operating system to several utilities automatically except for a few key input to
confirm the specification. Also, you can install the system with the same specification as before when re-installing the
system. We recommend you to create [Configuration Diskette] to setup the servers from EXPRESSBUILDER.
IMPORTANT: You can not create [Configuration Diskette] for Microsoft® Windows
Server™ 2003 x64 Editions.
NOTE: You can install Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000 without [Configuration
Diskette]. Also, you can modify/newly create [Configuration Diskette] during the setup
with EXPRESSBUILDER.
Creating Configuration Diskette
This section describes about specifying setup information that is necessary for operating system installation and creating
[Configuration Diskette]. Follow the procedure below.
NOTE: In the procedure below, the folder name that is specified when installing Trekking
command is assumed as [Configuration Diskette Creator].
1. Start the operating system.
2. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu will appear.
3. Right-click on the screen or left-click [Software Setup]. The menu will appear.
4. Click [Configuration Diskette Creator].
Configuration Diskette Creator window is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-12
5. Click [Create New Information files] from the [File] menu.
The [Disk Environment] dialog box will be displayed.
6. Specify each item and click [OK].
The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order, such as [Basic Information] dialog
box.
7. Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click [Next].
NOTE: If you click on [Cancel], all the input value will be deleted.
When completing the specification of setup information, the [Save Setup Information] dialog box will appear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-13
8. Confirm that the [Configuration Diskette] check box is checked and type the file name for the Setup File in
[File Name].
9. Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1.44 MB into the floppy disk drive and click [OK].
Now [Configuration Diskette] has been created. [Configuration Diskette] is used when you install Windows
Server 2003 or Windows 2000. Put a label and keep it in a safe place.
NOTE: For information on the contents of each item, refer to the Online Help.
If you want to modify the information file that already exists, click [Modify information files] on
Configuration Diskette Creator window. Refer to the Help to modify the inf file.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-14
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver
To install an optional Mass Storage Driver that is supported by Express Setup, follow the procedure below to create
[Configuration Diskette]:
1. Display Configuration Diskette Creator window.
2. From the [File] menu, click [Create new information files].
[Disk Environment] dialog box will be displayed.
3. Specify each item and click [OK].
The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order, such as [Disk Environment] dialog
box.
4. Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click [Next].
NOTE: If you click [Cancel], all the input value will be deleted.
5. When [User and application setup] is displayed, check [Apply OEM-FD for mass storage device].
6. When the [Save Setup Information] dialog box is displayed, confirm that the [Configuration Diskette] check
box is checked and input file name for the Setup File in [File Name].
7. Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1.44 MB into the floppy disk drive and click on [OK].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-15
ESMPRO
ESMPRO (referred to as ESMPRO hereafter) lets a system administrator manage remote servers across a network.
ESMPRO monitors server hardware and software configurations, failures, and performance. With log data collected by
ESMPRO, a system administrator can track long-term and short-term performance, monitor server usage, create graphs
to record trends, and check server failure rates. The administrator can use the information collected to create more
efficient data routing procedures and optimize server usage.
Functions and Features
ESMPRO offers many functions and features for managing remote servers across a network. These features help the
system administrator perform daily system operation, system extension, and transfer tasks. Some features of ESMPRO
Manager include:
Hardware and software server configuration
– Hardware resources mounted in servers, such as the processor, memory, disks, disk arrays, and LAN
boards.
– Software resources, such as operating system information and drivers running on each server.
Server failures
– On-screen real-time displays provide the system administrator with the failure type, location, cause, and
suggested corrective action.
– Failure data includes hardware failure information such as system board temperature, memory failure,
crashes, and software failure information.
Performance
– ESMPRO monitors server performance and displays server usage on the screen and displays information,
such as the rate of processor load, memory usage, disk usage, and LAN traffic. Usage threshold values can
help the system administrator monitor and prevent server overloads.
For installation procedure and detailed explanations on ESMPRO, refer to the online document in the
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
Supplement
Note the following in addition to the NOTE that has been described to the online document for ESMPRO.
Indication on ESMPRO Data Viewer after Hot-Add/Remove Memory
If you add or remove a memory board dynamically by using hot-add/remove feature, the added or removed
memory size will not be indicated correctly on Data Viewer of ESMPRO Manager unless the system is
rebooted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-16
DianaScope
DianaScope is a software application for remote management of the Express5800 series.
See the online documents for details on the functions and installation of DianaScope.
NOTES:
One server license is required for each server to be managed remotely by using
DianaScope.
Please contact your service representative in order to purchase this accessory.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-17
Power Console Plus
Power Console Plus is a utility to control the RAID system. Use of Power Console Plus enables operations (e.g.,
monitoring and maintenance) of RAID systems that are constructed on local Express servers and Express servers
connected through networks (TCP/IP). The operations can be done online on graphical screens without the system being
stopped.
Major Functions
Power Console Plus has the following features:
Supporting the Wizard function to facilitate configuration
Enabling the change of RAID levels
Being compatible with SAF-TE
Supporting the performance monitor
Supporting enclosure functions such as temperature monitoring, power monitoring, and fan monitoring
Enabling the settings of Write, Read, and Cache policies for each logical drive
Supporting the save and restore functions for configuration
Enabling the display of the SCSI transfer rate
Components
Power Console Plus consists of the following five components:
SNMP Agent
This function is not yet supported. Do not install SNMP Agent.
MegaRAID Service Monitor
This function enables ESMPRO to monitor the MegaRAID controller by registering event logs. Install
MegaRAID Service Monitor in the Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted.
MegaRAID Client
This function controls the RAID system on graphical screens. Install MegaRAID Client in the Express server
in which the MegaRAID controller mounted or in the management PC that is connected through the Express
server and network.
MegaRAID Server
Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network. Install MegaRAID Server in the Express server
in which the MegaRAID controller mounted.
MegaRAID Registration Server
Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network. Install in one of Express servers and
management PCs that are connected through network. The above components must be installed correctly for
establishing the environment to use Power Console Plus.
Power Console Plus components to be installed are different between the target servers and management PC.
Server:
Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted
Install the following two components in this server:
– MegaRAID Service Monitor
– MegaRAID Client
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-18
Management PC:
Management PC that monitors and controls servers via the network (TCP/IP)
When managing array on Terminal Server working on Windows NT Server Version 4.0 Terminal Server
Edition, prepare PC, and install Management PC component. Management PC does not guarantee operation
on Client, which used Terminal Server, Terminal Server Emulator, WBT.
Start Power Console Plus of management PC, after powering on the machines where "Server" and
"Management Server" are installed.
Install the following component in this PC:
– MegaRAID Client
Management server:
Machine that manages all servers that are monitored and controlled by management PCs
Install the following components in one of the servers or management PCs:
– MegaRAID Server
– MegaRAID Registration Server
Server Setup
Operating Environment
This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a server.
Hardware
– Memory:
Size large enough for operating system operation + 10 MB or more
– Free space of the hard disk:
10 MB or more
– Display unit:
Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger
– Required peripheral equipment:
Network Interface card
CD-ROM unit
Pointing device such as a mouse
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-19
Management PC Setup
This section explains Power Console Plus setup in a computer that manages servers via the network (TCP/IP).
Operating Environment
This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a management PC.
Hardware
– Machine:
Express5800 series
PC/AT-compatible machine (which contains Intel Pentium or a processor at least equivalent to it)
– Memory:
Size large enough for operating system operation + 10 MB or more
– Free space of the hard disk:
10 MB or more
– Display unit:
Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger
– Required peripheral equipment:
Network Interface card
CD-ROM unit
Pointing device such as a mouse
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-20
BMC ONLINE UPDATE
The BMC firmware is updated with the BMC Firmware file.
IMPORTANT: Do not turn off the DC power during while updating the BMC Firmware.
The updated BMC firmware becomes valid after restarting the system.
Hardware Requirement
Hard disk drive
2MB
Supported operating systems:
Windows® 2000 Server
Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition
Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise Edition
Red Hat Linux Enterprise Linux ES 3
Red Hat Linux Enterprise Linux AS 3
Installation
Windows Server 2003 / Windows 2000
1. Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu of EXPRESSBUILDER starts automatically.
2. Select [BMC Online Update].
BMC Online Update installer starts. Follow the installer instructions to install.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-21
Linux
1. Copy the following file in the suitable directory from CD-ROM.
cp /mnt/cdrom/BMCTOOL/OnlineUp/BmcOnlineUpdate.i386.
2. Expand the rpm file.
rpm –ivh BmcOnlineUpdate.i386
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-22
Startup
Windows Server 2003
Select [All Programs] → [BmcOnlineUpdate] → [BmcOnlineUpdate].
Windows 2000
Click [Programs] → [BmcOnlineUpdate] → [BmcOnlineUpdate].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-23
Linux
Enter the following command to start the program.
cd /usr/BmcOnlineUpdate
./BmcOnlineUpdate
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-24
Uninstallation
Windows Server 2003
1. Select [All Programs] → [Control Panel] → [Add or Remove Programs].
2. Click [BmcOnlineUpdate].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-25
Windows 2000
1. Select [Setting] → [Control Panel] → [Add or Remove Programs].
2. Click [BmcOnlineUpdate].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-26
Linux
1. Enter the following command to remove the file.
rm /usr/BmcOnlineUpdate/*
2. Enter the following command to remove the directory.
rmdir /usr/BmcOnlineUpdate
Error Messages
Message
Action
Update isn't necessary.
Illegal data.
The firmware is in up-to-date state.
The data is not for the target device.
Update the firmware with the data of the target device.
BMC information can't be acquired.
Check if the remote management card is correctly installed.
Update the firmware after making sure that the card is
correctly installed.
Cannot enter the online mode.
Failed to save the current data.
Cannot enter the update mode.
BMC is possibly in Busy state.
Try again several minutes later.
An error was occurred while data is
being updated.
Termination process failed.
The IPMI Driver not found.
BMC is not supported.
Install the IPMI driver.
The BMC does not support the update function. Updating
by this tool is unavailable.
If updating still fails, contact your service representative.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Maintenance
This chapter describes the daily maintenance of the server and precautions when relocating or storing the server.
MAKING BACKUP COPIES
It is recommended that you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disks of the server on a regular
basis. For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools, contact your service representative.
When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration, select "System Information Management"
and then "Save" of the Off-line Maintenance Utility to make a backup copy of the system information.
ALSO MAKE A BACKUP COPY OF THE DISK ARRAY CONFIGURATION
DATA IF YOUR SYSTEM IS IN THE ARRAY CONFIGURATION. WHEN
YOUR HARD DISKS HAVE BEEN AUTO-REBUILT DUE TO A FAILURE, IT
IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE A BACKUP COPY OF THE
CONFIGURATION DATA. TO MAKE A BACKUP COPY OF THE
CONFIGURATION DATA, USE THE CONFIGURATION UTILITY THAT IS
RESIDENT IN THE FLASH MEMORY ON THE OPTIONAL DISK ARRAY
CONTROLLER BOARD. REFER TO THE MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH THE
BOARDCLEANING
Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the serer in a good shape.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.
Do not remove the lithium battery.
Disconnect the power plug before cleaning with the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
High temperature
Make sure to complete board installation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
Cleaning the Server
For daily cleaning, wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth. Follow the procedure below if stains
remain on the surfaces:
IMPORTANT:
To avoid altering the material and colour of the server, do not use volatile solvents such
as thinner and benzene to clean the server.
The power receptacle, the cables, the connectors on the rear panel of server, and the
inside of the server must be kept dry. Do not moisten them with water.
1. Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).
2. Unplug the power cord of the server from the power outlet.
3. Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth.
4. Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and squeeze it firmly.
5. Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4.
6. Soak a soft cloth in water, squeeze it firmly, and wipe the server with it once again.
7. Wipe the server with a dry cloth.
8. Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth.
Cleaning the Interior
One of the most important items in a good maintenance program is regular and thorough cleaning of the interior of the
server, especially around the I/O board.
Dust build-up inside the server can lead to several problems. As dust acts as a thermal insulator, a build-up can prevent
proper system cooling. Excessive heat will shorten the life of server components. Also, dust may contain conductive or
corrosive materials that can cause short circuits or corrosion of electrical contacts.
How often you should clean the interior of the server depends on the environment in which it is located. For most office
environments, you probably should clean the server every 12 months. For more severe environments, clean the interior
every 6 months.
Cleaning the interior of the server entails powering off the server and removing the left side cover. You will need a
small vacuum cleaner (with plastic tipped nozzle and electrostatic protection), computer grade canned air, and a small
brush for cleaning the interior.
Follow the procedure below to clean the interior of the server.
WARNING
Unplug all power cords.
Unplug all power cords before performing any maintenance. Voltage is present inside the server
and display unit even after the power is turned off. All voltage is removed only when the power
cord is unplugged.
1. Turn off the server and unplug all power cables.
2. Remove the top cover. (See Chapter 9.)
3. Use a small brush to loosen any dust and debris on the I/O board.
4. Use computer grade canned air to blow dust off components on the I/O board.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-3
5. Use a small vacuum cleaner with plastic tip to vacuum out dust and debris from the interior of the server.
6. Reinstall the top cover. (See Chapter 9.)
7. Reconnect all power cables and turn on the server.
Cleaning the Keyboard and Mouse
Make sure that the server and peripheral devices are all off-powered (the POWER lamp goes off), and then wipe the
keyboard surface with a dry cloth.
The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation. To keep the mouse ball clean,
use the mouse in a place with little dust. Follow the steps below to clean the mouse regularly:
1. Prepare cold or lukewarm water, neutral detergent, alcohol, two dry soft clothes, and cotton swabs.
2. Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).
3. Turn the mouse upside down, and rotate the mouse ball cover counter clockwise to remove it.
4. Take out the ball from the mouse. Cover the bottom of the mouse with your hand, and turn your hand holding
the mouse (the mouse is on your palm with the button upward). The mouse ball is released onto your palm.
Mouse ball
Mouse ball cover
Roller
Bottom View
5. Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and squeeze it firmly.
6. Rub off stains on the mouse ball. Softly wipe the mouse ball with the cloth prepared in Step 5.
7. Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth.
8. Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab soaked with alcohol. Wipe stains slowly and
carefully by rotating rollers with the tip of the cotton swab.
9. Blow out any dust from the mouse. Protect your eyes from the dust.
10. Put the mouse ball back into the mouse.
11. Place the mouse ball cover, and rotate it clockwise until it is locked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4
Cleaning CD-ROM
A dusty CD-ROM or dust-accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly.
Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and CD-ROM regularly:
1. Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit).
2. Press the Open/Close button on the front of the CD-ROM drive.
The tray comes out.
3. Hold the CD-ROM lightly and take it out from the tray.
NOTE: Do not touch the signal side of the CD-ROM with your hand.
4. Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth.
IMPORTANT: Do not wipe the lens of the CD-ROM drive. Doing so may damage the
lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive.
5. Press the Open/Close button or gently push on the tray front to close the tray.
6. Wipe the signal side of the CD-ROM with a dry soft cloth.
IMPORTANT: Wipe CD-ROMs from the centre to the outside. Use CD-ROM cleaner
only if necessary. Cleaning a CD-ROM with record spray/cleaner, benzene, or thinner
causes damage to the CD-ROM contents. At worst, inserting the CD-ROM into the server
may cause failure.
NG
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-5
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS
The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server.
Use the System Diagnostics program in EXPRESSBUILDER provided with the server to diagnose the server.
Test Items
The following items are tested in system diagnostics.
Memory
Processor cache memory
Hard disk used as a system
IMPORTANT: When running the System Diagnostics, make sure to remove the LAN
cable. When running the System Diagnostics with the LAN cable connected, the network
may be influenced.
NOTE: On checking the hard disk, no data is written into the disk.
Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics
There are two ways to diagnose the server: using the local console (keyboard) of the server itself, and using the
management PC via serial port (remote console).
IMPORTANT: Two methods (LAN and serial port) are mentioned in the Chapter 6
"EXPRESSBUILDER" as the way of communicating in remote console. Use the serial port
to run System Diagnostics with remote console. The LAN connection is not for System
Diagnostics.
Start the diagnostics program as follows:
1. Shutdown the operating system, and turn off the server. Then, unplug the power cord.
2. Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server.
3. Plug the power cord and turn on the server.
4. Use the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to reboot the server.
See Chapter 6 "EXPRESSBUILDER" for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-6
The following menu appears when starting the server using the EXPRESSBUILDER.
Local console
Remote console
5. Select [Tools].
6. Select [System Diagnostics].
The System Diagnostics starts and completes in approximately three minutes.
When the diagnosis completes, the display changes as shown in the figure below.
Diagnosis tool title
Test windows title
TeDoLi(TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00(Build020901.1.1m)
Test result
Test End
Start10:06:58 End 10:09:58 Pass 000:03:00 TestTime 000:03:00
Test End : NormalEnd
03
AbnormalEnd 00 ForceEnd 00
<System>
MEM
CACHE
<SCSI>
Memory
Cache
16 count
49 count
NormalEnd
NormalEnd
HDD_02:000 DK32DJ-36W
89 count
NormalEnd
[Enter] Detail Information
[ESC] Return to Enduser Menu
Guide line
Test window
Diagnosis tool title: shows a name of this diagnosis and version information.
Test windows title: shows the progress of diagnosis. When it completes, it shows "Test End"
Test Result:
shows the information including time of start, end and progress, and result of the
diagnosis.
Guide line:
shows a description of keys to navigate the window.
Test window:
Move the cursor and press Enter to view the detail of the diagnosis.
If an error is detected during the System Diagnostics, the test result shows "Abnormal End" in red colour.
Move the cursor and press Enter on the diagnosis where the error occurred. Take a note of the error message
showed, and contact your service representative.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-7
7. Follow the Guide line shown at the bottom of the screen and press ESC to show the End user Menu shown
below.
TeDoLi (TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00 (Build020901.1.1m)
Enduser Menu
<Test Result>
<Device List>
<Log Info>
<Option>
<Reboot>
Please choose a function by the arrow key and push Enter key.
<Test Result> shows the diagnosis completed screen aforementioned.
<Device List> shows the information of all the devices connected.
<Log Info>
shows the log information and error messages of the diagnosis. It can be saved to a floppy
disk. To save the log information to a floppy disk, insert a formatted floppy disk in a floppy
disk drive and select <Save[F]>.
<Option>
<Reboot>
change where to output log
Restarts the Express Server.
8. Select <Reboot> in the End user Menu above.
The Express Server restarts and EXPRESSBUILDER boot the system.
9. Exit EXPRESSBUILDER, and remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
10. Turn off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle.
11. Reconnect all the LAN cables to the server.
12. Plug the power code.
This completes the System Diagnostics.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-8
RELOCATING/STORING THE SERVER
Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server:
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.
Do not connect/disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to
a power source.
IMPORTANT:
If the server needs to be relocated or stored due to a change in the floor layout to a great
extent, contact your service representative.
Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard disk, if any.
Make sure not to apply a shock to hard disks when relocating the server if it contains
any.
It is recommended that the server and the internal devices should be stored in a place
where the room temperature can be maintained. It is important for the server or internal
devices to work normally after storage. Store the device in a place where temperature
ranges between -10 to 55ºC and humidity ranges between 20 to 80% without dew
condensation.
If you use the server after transported or relocated, check the system timer and adjust it
if necessary. If the system timer advances or delays remarkably with the passage of time,
contact your service representative to repair it. The server or internal option device may
be dewed if it is brought to a warm place from a cold place suddenly. Using a server or
an internal device with dew attached may cause malfunction or failure. Make sure to
adapt them to the operating environment before using them.
1. Take floppy disk and CD-ROM out of the server, if any.
2. Power off the server (the POWER lamp goes off).
3. Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.
4. Remove all the cables from the server.
5. Hold the server by its bottom with at least four persons to carry the server.
6. Protect the server with the shock-absorbing materials, and pack it securely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
If your server does not operate as expected, read this chapter before assuming a failure.
NOTE: For provision against an unexpected failure, it is recommended to install the
Off-line Maintenance Utility, ESMPRO, on the server and client computers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2
SYSTEM VIEWERS
Monitor the occurrence of fault by ESMPRO during system operation.
Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to ESMPRO Manager on the language PC. Check whether any
alert is reported on the Operation Window, Data Viewer, or Alert Viewer of ESMPRO Manager.
[Example]
NEC ESMPRO Manager
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-3
LAMPS
The following describes lamps on the server and their indications.
POWER/SLEEP Lamp
POWER/SLEEP lamp
The green POWER/SLEEP lamp lights to indicate normal operation while the server is powered. When the server is
off-powered, the POWER/SLEEP lamp stays unlit.
The POWER/SLEEP lamp indicates that the server is running in the power-saving mode (sleep mode). If the operating
system supports the power-saving mode such as Windows 2000, pressing the SLEEP switch blinks the POWER/SLEEP
lamp in green and place the server in the power-saving mode. Press the POWER switch to turn out the POWER/SLEEP
lamp and place the server back in the normal mode.
The power-saving mode is only available when the operating system supports the power-saving feature. Some operating
systems allow you to set the server to automatically turn in the power-saving mode when no access is made to the server
for a certain period of time or to select the power-saving mode with a command.
STATUS Lamp
The STATUS lamp stays lit green when the server is in successful operation. When the STATUS lamp is unlit, flashing
green or lit/flashing amber, it indicates that the server has failed.
The following table lists indications of the STATUS lamp, descriptions, and actions to take.
NOTES:
If the server has ESMPRO or Off-line Maintenance Utility installed, you can view the
System Event Log (SEL) to identify the cause of a trouble.
To cycle power to the server, shut down the server from the operating system and reboot
it, if available. If the shutdown from the operating system is not available, reset or
execute the forced shut down or disconnect and connect the power cord to reboot the
server.
STATUS lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4
STATUS lamp
indication
Description
Action
Flashing green
Contact your service representative.
The server is in operation with its
processor degraded.
Start the BIOS SETUP and select [Main] - [Processor
Settings] to identify the degraded processor and replace it
as soon as possible.
Or, start the BIOS SETUP and select [Main] - [Processor
Settings] - [Processor Retest] - [Yes], and then select [Exit] -
[Exit Saving Changes] to solve the problem.
Contact your service representative.
Start the BIOS SETUP and select [Advanced] - [Memory
Configuration] to identify the degraded memory (DIMM) and
replace it as soon as possible.
The server is in operation with its
memory degraded.
Or, start the BIOS SETUP and select [Advanced] - [Memory
Configuration] - [Memory Retest] - [Yes], and then select
[Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes] to solve the problem.
The system can continue operation if the status lamp
flashes green. However, consult with your service
representative.
A correctable memory or bus
error was detected.
Unlit
The server is powered off.
POST is in progress.
Power on the server.
Wait for a while. The STATUS lamp will light in a few
seconds after POST completion.
A processor error occurred
(IERR).
Cycle power to the server. If POST displays an error
message, take a note on the message and contact your
service representative.
A processor thermal error was
detected. (Thermal-Trip)
A watchdog timer has timed out.
A PCI system error occurred.
A PCI parity error occurred.
An uncorrectable memory error
was detected.
An uncorrectable bus error was
detected.
POST terminates with error.
Memory dumping is requested.
A thermal error (critical) was
detected.
Wait until memory dumping completes.
Check internal fans for dust or debris. Also make sure that
the fans are firmly connected.
Lit amber
If this error indication persists, contact your service
representative.
A voltage error (critical) was
detected.
Contact your service representative.
A power supply(ies) failed to
operate.
Contact your service representative.
Flashing
amber
A power alarm was detected in a Identify the failed power supply unit and contact your
power supply unit.
service representative.
A fan alarm was detected.
Make sure that the fan units are firmly connected.
If this error indication persists, contact your service
representative.
A thermal error (warning) was
detected.
Check internal fans for dust or debris. Also make sure that
the fan units are firmly connected.
If this error indication persists, contact your service
representative.
A voltage error (warning) was
detected.
Contact your service representative.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-5
DISK ACCESS Lamp
The DISK ACCESS lamp indicates the state of hard disks in the 3.5-inch disk bay.
This lamp lights green every time any of such hard disk is accessed.
When the DISK ACCESS lamp is lit amber, it indicates that a hard disk error occurred. To identify a failed hard disk,
see the lamps provided for each hard disk.
When the DISK ACCESS lamp flashes green or amber alternately, the hard disk drive connected to an internal disk
array controller is under rebuilding.
DISK ACCESS lamp
LAN1/LAN2 ACCESS Lamp
The LAN1/LAN2 ACCESS lamp is lit green when the server is connected to LAN. The lamp blinks while the server is
accessed through the LAN (for packet transmission). The value next to the icon indicates the number of the network
port on the rear panel.
LAN1 ACCESS lamp
LAN2 ACCESS lamp
UID Lamp
The UID is located on the front and rear panel of the server. Pressing the UID switch on the front panel turns UID lamp
blue, and allows you to locate the server you are working on. Use this switch when several servers are installed in the
system.
Pressing the UID switch again turns off the UID lamp.
You can make ESMPRO Manager, DianaScope, or the remote management feature of Web server to flash the UID lamp.
When you finished working, turn off the UID lamp.
UID switch
UID lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-6
Attention Lamp
Attention lamp
The Attention lamp lights amber when location where an error occurred cannot be identified automatically or errors
occurred in two or more locations. Check the error log to identify the location.
Processor Board Error Lamp
Two processor board error lamps are located at the front and the rear of the server. These lamps light amber when an
error occurs on the processor board. If the lamp lights, check the lamp indication on processorVRM error lamp in front
of the processor board. The lamp being lit amber indicates that the relevant processor or VRM fails.
Processor board error lamp
Processor/VRM error lamps
Processor board error lamp
REAR
FRONT
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-7
Memory Board Error Lamp
Memory board error lamp
The memory board error lamp lights amber if an error occurs on memory board or on DIMM installed in memory board.
Check the memory board Attention lamp being lit amber to identify the failed memory board.
In addition, when you press the switch for DIMM slot error lamp on the failed memory board, the DIMM slot error
lamp lights amber. Then, you can identify the slot containing the failed DIMM.
DIMM slot error lamps
Switch for DIMM slot error lamp
Memory board
Attention lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-8
I/O Board Error Lamp
The front I/O board error lamp lights amber when an error occurs on I/O board or PCI board installed in your server.
Check the lamp indication on the rear of the server.
When the rear I/O board lamp lights amber, the I/O board may be failed. When any of the PCI slot error lamps below
the PCI slots light amber, the relevant PCI board or I/O board slot itself may be failed.
I/O board error lamp
I/O board error lamp
PCI slot error lamps
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-9
Power Unit Error Lamp
Power unit error lamp
The Power unit error lamp lights amber when an error occurs on the power supply unit.
Check the power unit error lamp to identify the failed power supply unit.
Power unit error lamps
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-10
Fan Error Lamp
The fan error lamp lights amber when an error occurs on the fan. Check the Fan Fault lamp being lit red to identify the
failed fan (see "FAN Fault Lamps" described later).
Fan error lamp
Thermal Error Lamp
Thermal error lamp
The thermal error lamp lights amber when an abnormal temperature in the server is detected. Check the room
temperature where the server is installed.
Access Lamps
The access lamps for the floppy disk drive and the CD-ROM drive light when access is made to a media in the drive.
ACCESS lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-11
Memory Board Lamps
3
2
1
1
2
3
Memory board POWER lamp
Lights green during power-on. Flashes green during rebuilding (e.g., memory board is hot-added).
Memory board Attention lamp
Lights amber when an error occurred on memory board or DIMM.
Memory board Redundancy lamp
Lights green in memory mirroring or memory RAID configuration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-12
Hard Disk Drive Lamp (DISK Lamp)
The disk lamp on the 3.5-inch disk bay has different meanings depending on the display status.
DISK lamps
Lit green
The hard disk is installed and powered on.
Blinking green
Indicates that the hard disk is accessed.
Lit amber
Indicates that the installed hard disk is defected in the disk array configuration.
NOTE: While hard disks are in the disk array configuration (RAID1/RAID5 or RAID0+1),
a single failed hard disk does not affect the operation of the server. However, it is
recommended to replace the failed hard disk and auto-rebuild (reconfigure) the hard disks
as soon as possible. (You can hot-swap such a failed hard disk.)
Alternate lighting green or amber
Indicates that the hard disk is being rebuilt (this status is not a failure). If the defected hard disk is replaced
with a new one in the disk array configuration, the data is automatically rebuilt (auto rebuild function). During
the rebuild operation, the lamp is lit green or amber alternatively.
The lamp goes off when the rebuild is terminated normally. The lamp goes on amber if the rebuild fails.
IMPORTANT: To abort rebuilding, power off the server. In such a case, restart the server,
hot-swap the failed hard disk, and restart rebuilding. Observe the following notes to use the
auto-rebuild feature.
Do not power off the server. (If the server is powered off before rebuilding hard disks,
the auto-rebuild feature will not start.)
When you removed a hard disk, wait at least 90 seconds before installing the hard disk
back again.
Do not replace another hard disk while rebuilding is in progress.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-13
LAN Connector Lamps
LAN1 and LAN2 connectors on the rear panel have two lamps as follows.
LINK/ACT lamp
LAN port 2
1000/100/10 lamp
LAN port 1
1000/100/10 lamp
LINK/ACT lamp
The link/ACT lamp indicates the state of each network port normally equipped with the server. If the power is
supplied to the server and the hub and they are correctly connected with each other, the lamp is lit green
(LINK state). If information is transmitted through a network port, the lamp blinks green (ACT state).
If the lamp is not lit in the LINK state, check the network cable and the cable connection. If the lamp is not lit
still after the checking, the network (LAN) controller may be defected. Contact your service representative.
1000/100/10 lamps
The 1000/100/10 lamp indicates whether the LAN2 port normally equipped with the server is operated
through the 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T network interface. If the lamp is lit amber, the
network port is operated through 1000BASE-T. If the lamp is lit green, the network port is operated through
100BASE-TX. If the lamp is off, the network port is operated through 10BASE-T.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-14
PCI Slot Lamps
PCI Slot
Power Lamp
PCI Slot
Fault Lamp
PCI Slot Power Lamp
The PCI slot power lamp lights in green when a PCI board is installed in the slot and powered up.
PCI Slot Fault Lamp
This lamp is available only when the operating system is Windows 2003/2000.
If the driver of a Hot Plug PCI board is stopped under Windows 2003/2000 and then the PCI board is logically
disconnected from the system, PCI slot fault lamp blinks in amber.
If an error occurred on a PCI board or the slot where is installed the PCI board, this lamp lights in amber.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-15
FAN Fault Lamps
FAN Fault lamp is adjacent to each fan module. These lamps are triangular in shape and point to their respective fans.
When the cooling fan is working normally, the lamp does not light. When a fan is not working normally, the lamp lights
in red. A cooling fan failure is also indicated by the status lamp located on the front panel. The failed fan may be
hot-swapped.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove a fan that is normally operating. Ask your service
representative for replacement of the cooling fan. If a cooling fan fails, do not continue to
operate the system, but ask your service representative for replacement as soon as you can.
FAN Fault lamp
FAN Fault lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-16
ERROR MESSAGES
If an error occurs in the server, an error message appears on the display unit connected to the server.
Error Messages after Power-on
Powering on the server automatically starts the self-diagnostic program, POST (Power On Self-Test). When the POST
detects any error, it displays an error message and its measure on the display unit.
Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors. However, even when there is no hardware failure, use of the
keyboard or mouse at the following timing causes the POST to assume a keyboard controller error and stop processing.
Immediately after the server is powered
Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to a keyboard instruction (simultaneous key entry of Ctrl
+ Alt + Delete)
Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to an operating system instruction
During hardware initialization following restart of the POST
When the POST detects a hardware failure due to one of the above reason, restart the server once again. If the same
error message reappears, you may assume there is no hardware error. To ensure normal operation of the server, however,
make sure to follow the following restrictions.
Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the memory count appears on the screen following
the server power-on.
Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the start-up message of the SCSI Configuration
Utility appears on the screen following the server reboot.
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the on-screen message before contacting your service
representative. The alarm indication would be a great help for maintenance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-17
POST Error Messages
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the display unit screen. The following table lists error
messages, descriptions, and actions to take.
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before consulting with your service
representative. Alarm messages are useful information for maintenance.
Error
Error message
Recommended Action
code
0200
0210
0211
0212
Failure Fixed Disk.
Stuck Key.
Keyboard error.
Contact your service representative.
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.
• Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.
• Restart the system. If the error cannot be corrected, contact
Keyboard Controller Failed.
your service representative.
0213
0220
Keyboard locked - Unlock key switch.
Release the lock of the key switch. If the error cannot be
corrected in spite of the release of the lock, contact your service
representative.
Start the SETUP. If the error cannot be corrected in spite of the
start of SETUP, contact your service representative.
Monitor type does not match CMOS - Run
SETUP.
0230
0231
0232
0250
System RAM Failed at offset.
Shadow RAM Failed at offset.
Extended RAM Failed at address line.
System battery is dead - Replace and run
SETUP.
Contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative to replace the battery. (After
restarting the computer, start the SETUP to provide the setting
again.)
0251
0252
System CMOS checksum bad - Default
configuration used.
The default values have just been set. Start the SETUP to provide
the setting again. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your
service representative.
The password has just been cleared. Start the SETUP to provide
the setting again.
Password checksum bad - Passwords
cleared.
0260
0270
0271
0280
System timer error.
Real time clock error.
Check date and time setting.
Previous boot incomplete – Default
configuration used
Start the SETUP to set the date and time again. If the same error
occurs successively in spite of the resetting, contact your service
representative.
Contact your service representative.
02B0
02B1
Diskette drive A error.
Diskette drive B error.
Start the SETUP to set the "Legacy Floppy A" and "Legacy
Floppy B" in the Main menu again. If the same error occurs
successively in spite of the resetting, contact your service
representative.
02B2
2B3
02D0
02D1
Incorrect Drive A type - run SETUP.
Incorrect Drive B type - run SETUP.
System cache error - Cache disabled.
Start the SETUP to provide the setting again. If the error cannot
be corrected, contact your service representative.
The cache cannot be used. Contact your service representative.
System Memory exceeds the CPU's caching Contact your service representative.
limit.
02F5
02F6
02F7
0500
0501
0502
0503
0504
0505
0506
0507
0508
0611
0613
0614
DMA Test Failed.
Software NMI Failed.
Fail-safe Timer NMI Failed.
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 01
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 02
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 03
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 04
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 05
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 06
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 07
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 08
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 09
IDE configuration changed.
COM A configuration changed.
COM A config. error - device disabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-18
Error
code
Error message
Recommended Action
0615
0616
0617
0618
0619
061A
0B00
0B1B
0B1C
0B28
COM B configuration changed.
COM B config. error - device disabled.
Floppy configuration changed.
Floppy config. error - device disabled.
Parallel port configuration changed.
Parallel port config. error - device disabled.
Rebooted during BIOS boot at Post Code.
PCI System Error on Bus/Device/Function.
PCI Parity Error on Bus/Device/Function.
Unsupported Processor detected on
Processor 1.
Unsupported Processor detected on
Processor 2.
Unsupported Processor detected on
Processor 3.
Unsupported Processor detected on
Processor 4.
Contact your service representative.
Make sure that the server supports the processor. If you are
not sure, contact your service representative to request the
maintenance.
0B29
0B2A
0B2B
0B30
0B31
0B32
0B33
0B34
0B35
0B36
0B37
0B50
0B51
0B52
0B53
0B5F
Fan 1 Alarm occurred.
Fan 2 Alarm occurred.
Fan 3 Alarm occurred.
Fan 4 Alarm occurred.
Fan 5 Alarm occurred.
Fan 6 Alarm occurred.
Fan 7 Alarm occurred.
Fan 8 Alarm occurred.
Processor #1 with error taken off line.
Processor #2 with error taken offline.
Processor #3 with error taken offline.
Processor #4 with error taken offline.
Forced to use Processor with error
A fan failure or fan clogging may occur. Contact your service
representative to request the maintenance.
The processor is degraded. Contact your service
representative.
Because an error is detected in every processor, the system is
forcibly started. Contact your service representative.
0B60
0B61
0B62
0B63
0B64
0B65
0B66
0B67
0B70
DIMM group #1 has been disabled
DIMM group #2 has been disabled
DIMM group #3 has been disabled
DIMM group #4 has been disabled
DIMM group #5 has been disabled
DIMM group #6 has been disabled
DIMM group #7 has been disabled
DIMM group #8 has been disabled
Contact your service representative.
The error occurred during temperature sensor
reading.
0B71
0B74
System Temperature out of the range.
A fan failure or fan clogging may occur. Contact your service
representative to request the maintenance.
Contact your service representative.
The error occurred during voltage sensor
reading.
0B75
0B78
0B7C
System voltage out of the range.
The error occurred during fan sensor reading
The error occurred during redundant power
module confirmation
Contact you service representative to replace the power supply
unit.
0B7D
The normal operation can't be guaranteed
with use of only one PSU
Contact you service representative to add an additional power
supply unit or replace the existing power supply unit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-19
Error
code
Error message
Recommended Action
0B80
0B81
0B82
0B83
0B8A
0B8B
0B8C
0B8D
0B8E
0B8F
BMC Memory Test Failed.
BMC Firmware Code Area CRC check failed.
BMC core hardware failure.
BMC IBF or OBF check failed.
BMC SEL area full.
BMC progress check timeout.
BMC command access failed.
Could not redirect the console - BMC Busy -
Could not redirect the console - BMC Error -
Could not redirect the console - BMC
Parameter Error -
Turn off the power once and then on again to start the server. If
the error cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
0B90
0B91
0B92
BMC Platform Information Area corrupted.
BMC update firmware corrupted.
Internal Use Area of BMC FRU corrupted.
All the commands and functions other than the FRU command
and the EMP function can be used. This is not a fatal error.
Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server.
If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
0B93
0B94
BMC SDR Repository empty.
Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server.
If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
All the functions other than the function of accessing to SMC
through IPMB can be used. This is not a fatal error. Turn off the
power once and then on again to restart the server. If the error
cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.
IPMB signal lines do not respond.
0B95
BMC FRU device failure.
All the commands and functions other than the FRU command
and the EMP function can be used. This is not a fatal error.
Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server.
If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
0B96
0B97
0B98
0B99
0B9A
0B9B
0B9C
0B9D
0B9E
0B9F
0BB0
0BB1
0BC0
BMC SDR Repository failure.
BMC SEL device failure.
BMC RAM test error.
BMC Fatal hardware error.
BMC not responding.
Private I2C bus not responding.
BMC internal exception.
BMC A/D timeout error.
SDR repository corrupt.
SEL corrupt.
Turn off the power once and then on again to start the server. If
the error cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
SMBIOS - SROM data read error.
SMBIOS - SROM data checksum bad.
POST detected startup failure of 1st
Processor.
Contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative to replace the processor.
0BC1
0BC2
0BC3
POST detected startup failure of 2nd
Processor.
POST detected startup failure of 3rd
Processor.
POST detected startup failure of 4th
Processor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-20
Error
code
8120
Error message
Recommended Action
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #1.
Contact your service representative to replace the two DIMMs in
the relevant group.
8121
8122
8123
8124
8125
8126
8127
8130
8131
8132
8133
8134
8135
8136
8137
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #2.
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #3.
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #4.
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #5.
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #6.
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #7.
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #8.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #1.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #2.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #3.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #4.
Msmatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #5.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #6.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #7.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #8.
See the labels put on the DIMMs to make sure that the DIMMs of
the same type are installed in groups. If DIMMs of different types
are installed in one or more groups, contact the service
representative to replace DIMMs properly.
8140
8141
8142
8143
8144
8145
8146
8147
8150
8151
8160
DIMM group #1 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #2 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #3 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #4 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #5 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #6 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #7 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #8 with error is enabled.
NVRAM Cleared By Jumper.
Password Cleared By Jumper.
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on
Processor 1.
Contact your service representative to replace the two DIMMs in
the relevant group.
Turn off the power. Then recover the jumper setting to the original
setting.
Check the frequency of the processor. If it is unknown, contact
your service representative.
8161
8162
8163
8170
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on
Processor 2.
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on
Processor 3.
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on
Processor 4.
Processor 1 not operating at intended
frequency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-21
Error
code
8171
Error message
Recommended Action
Processor 2 not operating at intended
frequency
Check the frequency of the processor. If it is unknown, contact
your service representative.
8172
8173
817F
8200
Processor 3 not operating at intended
frequency
Processor 4 not operating at intended
frequency
All processors not operating at intended
frequency
Online Spare Memory was not ready.
DIMM type mismatch is detected when the online spare memory
feature is enabled.
Contact your service representative.
8201
Mirroring Memory was not ready.
DIMM type mismatch is detected or unnecessary installation in
group #2 is detected when the memory mirroring feature is
enabled. Check the DIMM type or installation. If the error cannot
be corrected, contact your service representative.
Check if capacity, type, and installation status of all DIMMs are
correct.
8202
8300
Memory RAID was not ready.
Secondary BIOS is corrupted.
Contact your service representative.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-22
The following figures show the location of specific components referenced in the POST error codes and messages table
listed above.
NOTE: Failed processors or memory boards can be also identified with the BIOS SETUP
utility.
Fans
Fan 3
Fan 6
Fan 2
Fan 8
Fan 5
Fan 1
Fan 4
Fan 7
Processors
Processor #3
Processor #1
Processor #2
Processor #4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-23
Memory board
The DIMM group consists of four DIMM boards.
DIMM #4
DIMM #3
DIMM #2
DIMM #1
Memory board slot #1 Memory board slot #2 Memory board slot #3 Memory board slot #4
1
2
3
4
DIMM #1
DIMM #2
DIMM #3
DIMM #4
DIMM
Group #1
DIMM #1
DIMM #2
DIMM #3
DIMM #4
DIMM
Group #3
DIMM #1
DIMM #2
DIMM #3
DIMM #4
DIMM
Group #5
DIMM #1
DIMM #2
DIMM #3
DIMM #4
DIMM
Group #7
DIMM
Group #2
DIMM
Group #4
DIMM
Group #6
DIMM
Group #8
Beep Codes
If an error occurs during the POST, the server beeps, indicating the type of error.
Each number indicates the number of short beeps, and a hyphen indicates a pause. For example, the beep interval
1-3-1-3 indicates 1 beep, pause, 3 beeps, pause, 1 beeps, pause, and 3 beeps notifying that the keyboard controller error.
Beep code
1-2
Description
Video BIOS initialization
error
Option ROM initialization
error
Recommended action
If nothing is displayed, check if the connector of the display unit is properly
connected. If the error persists, contact your service representative to
replace the I/O board.
If an expansion of Option ROM for additionally installed PCI board is not
displayed, check if the PCI board is properly installed. If the error persists,
contact your service representative to replace the I/O board or PCI board.
1-2
1-3-1-3
1-3-3-1
Keyboard controller error
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again. If the error persists, contact
your service representative to replace the I/O board.
Check if the DIMM and memory boards are properly connected. If the error
persists, contact your service representative to replace DIMM or memory
board.
Memory is not detected.
Or, DIMM type is
incorrect.
1-3-4-1
1-3-4-3
DRAM Address error
DRAM test Low Byte
error
1-4-1-1
DRAM test High Byte
error
1-5-1-1
1-5-2-2
1-5-2-3
Processor fails to start.
No processor error
Processors of various
types and voltages
coexist.
Check if the processor is properly installed. If the error persists, contact your
service representative to replace processor or processor board.
Check if the additionally installed processor is supported by the server.
Check also the installation of processor. If the error persists, contact your
service representative to replace the processor or processor board.
1-5-4-4
2-2-3-1
Power failure
Internal board may be faulty. Contact your service representative to identify
the faulty board and replace it with new one.
Unexpected interrupt test Contact your service representative to replace the I/O board.
error
NOTE: Beep code 1-5-4-2 informs you that AC power supply is interrupted due to power
failure or momentary voltage drop and the system is restarted. This is not an error.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-24
Error Messages on Virtual LCD
The remote management feature of DianaScope and Web Server allows the managed server to display the virtual LCD
(16 digits x 2 lines) and status lamps.
The virtual LCD displays the followings:
POST progress
Error occurred during operation or DC OFF (AC power is being on)
When POST detects an error, the POST error code is displayed on the virtual LCD upon completion of POST. See the
table for POST error codes for details.
POST Progress
POST Progress Code
Product ID
System BIOS Version
POWER ON
ASF Code
READY
ASF Message
POST Error Code
POWER ON
READY
Other Messages
POWER ON
ATTENTION
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-25
Messages displayed on upper line
On-screen
Description
message
Action
Prepare To Boot
POST completes normally.
This is not an error.
CPU Reconfigured
POST completes with processor
degraded.
Contact your service representative.
Try the following steps to cancel the error.
1. Start BIOS SETUP.
2. Select [Main] - Processor Settings] - [Processor
Retest] - [Yes].
3. Select [Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes].
Mem Reconfigured
POST completes with memory degraded. Contact your service representative.
Try the following steps to cancel the error.
1. Start BIOS SETUP.
2. Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] -
[Memory Retest] - [Yes].
3. Select [Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes].
M#1 D#1 C Err
M#1 D#2 C Err
M#1 D#3 C Err
M#1 D#4 C Err
M#2 D#1 C Err
M#2 D#2 C Err
M#2 D#3 C Err
M#2 D#4 C Err
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #1 on memory board #1.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #2 on memory board #1.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #3 on memory board #1.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #4 on memory board #1.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #1 on memory board #2.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #2 on memory board #2.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #3 on memory board #2.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #4 on memory board #2.
The system can continue operation. However,
consult with your service representative.
On-screen
message
Description
Action
M#3 D#1 C Err
M#3 D#2 C Err
M#3 D#3 C Err
M#3 D#4 C Err
M#4 D#1 C Err
M#4 D#2 C Err
M#4 D#3 C Err
M#4 D#4 C Err
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #1 on memory board #3.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #2 on memory board #3.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #3 on memory board #3.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #4 on memory board #3.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #1 on memory board #4.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #2 on memory board #4.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #3 on memory board #4.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #4 on memory board #4.
The system can continue operation. However,
consult with your service representative.
M#1 D#1 UC Err
M#1 D#2 UC Err
M#1 D#3 UC Err
M#1 D#4 UC Err
M#2 D#1 UC Err
M#2 D#2 UC Err
M#2 D#3 UC Err
M#3 D#4 UC Err
M#3 D#1 UC Err
M#3 D#2 UC Err
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #1 The system can continue operation if the status lamp
or DIMM #2 on memory board #1.
flashes green. However, consult with your service
representative.
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #3
or DIMM #4 on memory board #1.
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #1
or DIMM #2 on memory board #2.
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #3
or DIMM #4 on memory board #2.
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #1
or DIMM #2 on memory board #3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-26
M#3 D#3 UC Err
M#3 D#4 UC Err
M#4 D#1 UC Err
M#4 D#2 UC Err
M#4 D#3 UC Err
M#4 D#4 UC Err
M#1 BD C ErrX
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #3
or DIMM #4 on memory board #3.
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #1
or DIMM #2 on memory board #4.
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #3
or DIMM #4 on memory board #4.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
memory board #1.
The system can continue operation. However,
consult with your service representative.
M#2 BD C ErrX
M#3 BD C ErrX
M#4 BD C ErrX
M#1 BD UC ErrX
M#2 BD UC ErrX
M#3 BD UC ErrX
M#4 BD UC ErrX
PROC BD C ErrX
A correctable error frequently occurs on
memory board #2.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
memory board #3.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
memory board #4.
An uncorrectable error occurs on memory The system can continue operation if the status lamp
board #1.
flashes green. However, consult with your service
representative.
An uncorrectable error occurs on memory
board #2.
An uncorrectable error occurs on memory
board #3.
An uncorrectable error occurs on memory
board #4.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
processor board.
The system can continue operation. However,
consult with your service representative.
PROC BD UC ErrX An uncorrectable error occurs on
processor board.
The system can continue operation if the status lamp
flashes green. However, consult with your service
representative.
IO BD C ErrX
IO BD UC Err1
PCI S#3 C Err
PCI S#4 C Err
PCI S#5 C Err
A correctable error frequently occurs on
I/O board.
An uncorrectable error occurs on I/O
board.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
PCI board slot #3.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
PCI board slot #4.
The system can continue operation. However,
consult with your service representative.
Consult with your service representative.
The system can continue operation. However,
consult with your service representative.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
PCI board slot #5.
PCI S#1 Err
PCI S#2 Err
PCI S#3 Err
PCI S#4 Err
PCI S#5 Err
PCI S#6 Err
PCI S#7 Err
PCI S#8 Err
PCI S#9 Err
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #1.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #2.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #3.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #4.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #5.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #6.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #7.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #8.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #9.
Consult with your service representative.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-27
Messages displayed on lower line
On-screen message
Proc Missing
Description
Processor is not found.
Action
Contact your service representative.
240VA Power Down
Power On Cnt Alm
POWERGOOD dropped during power-on.
POWERGOOD signal error occurred at
power on/off.
Proc1 VccpAlm XX
Proc2 VccpAlm XX
Proc3 VccpAlm XX
Proc4 VccpAlm XX
VCCP voltage alarm occurred on processor
#1.
VCCP voltage alarm occurred on processor
#2.
VCCP voltage alarm occurred on processor
#3.
VCCP voltage alarm occurred on processor
#4.
BB +3.3v Alm XX
BB +3.3vs Alm XX
BB +5.0v Alm XX
BB +5.0vs Alm XX
BB +12v Alm XX
BB -12v Alm XX
VBAT Alm XX
BB +1.25v Alm XX
BB +1.5v Alm XX
BB +1.8v Alm XX
BB VTT Alm XX
+3.3V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+3.3Vs voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+5.0V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+5.0Vs voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+12V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
-12V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
Voltage alarm in lithium battery occurred.
+1.25V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+1.5V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+1.8V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+1.150V voltage alarm occurred on I/O
board.
VDD TNB Alm XX
VCACHE1 Alm XX
VCACHE2 Alm XX
+1.500V voltage alarm occurred on
processor board.
VCACHE1 voltage alarm occurred on
processor board.
VCACHE2 voltage alarm occurred on
processor board.
Proc 1 T-Trip
Proc 2 T-Trip
Proc 3 T-Trip
Proc 4 T-Trip
Processor 1 IERR
Processor 2 IERR
Processor 3 IERR
Processor 4 IERR
SB1 +3.3v Alm XX
Thermal Trip occurred on processor #1.
Thermal Trip occurred on processor #2.
Thermal Trip occurred on processor #3.
Thermal Trip occurred on processor #4.
IERR occurred on processor #1.
IERR occurred on processor #2.
IERR occurred on processor #3.
IERR occurred on processor #4.
+3.3V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI
backplane 1.
SB1 +5.0v Alm XX
SB1 +12v Alm XX
+5.0V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI
backplane 1.
+12V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI
backplane 1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-28
On-screen message
Description
Action
SB2 +3.3v Alm XX
+3.3V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI
backplane 2.
Contact your service representative.
SB2 +5.0v Alm XX
SB2 +12v Alm XX
+5.0V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI
backplane 2.
+12V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI
backplane 2.
SCSI A-1 Alm XX
SCSI A-2 Alm XX
SCSI A-3 Alm XX
SCSI B-1 Alm XX
SCSI B-2 Alm XX
SCSI B-3 Alm XX
Proc1 TempAlm XX
Proc2 TempAlm XX
Proc3 TempAlm XX
Proc4 TempAlm XX
BB Temp Alm XX
FP Temp Alm XX
OS shutdown Alm
WDT timeout
SCSI channel-A voltage error occurred.
SCSI channel-A voltage error occurred.
SCSI channel-A voltage error occurred.
SCSI channel-B voltage error occurred.
SCSI channel-B voltage error occurred.
SCSI channel-B voltage error occurred.
Processor #1 thermal error occurred.
Processor #2 thermal error occurred.
Processor #3 thermal error occurred.
Processor #4 thermal error occurred.
I/O board thermal error occurred.
Front panel thermal error occurred.
operating system shutdown alarm occurred.
Watchdog timer timeout error occurred.
Dump switch is pressed.
DUMP Request !
SMI timeout
SMI timeout occurred.
AC lost Alm 1
AC lost Alm 2
AC lost Alm 3
AC lost Alm 4
Power Unit 1 Alm
Power Unit 2 Alm
Power Unit 3 Alm
Power Unit 4 Alm
Predictive Alm 1
Predictive Alm 2
Predictive Alm 3
Predictive Alm 4
CPU Fan Alarm
PWR Fan Alarm
Sys Fan 1 Alarm
Sys Fan 2 Alarm
Sys Fan 3 Alarm
Sys Fan 4 Alarm
Sys Fan 5 Alarm
Sys Fan 6 Alarm
AC lost occurred on power unit #1.
AC lost occurred on power unit #2.
AC lost occurred on power unit #3.
AC lost occurred on power unit #4.
Power unit #1 Failure occurred.
Power unit #2 Failure occurred.
Power unit #3 Failure occurred.
Power unit #4 Failure occurred.
Predictive Failure occurred on power unit #1.
Predictive Failure occurred on power unit #2.
Predictive Failure occurred on power unit #3.
Predictive Failure occurred on power unit #4.
CPU FAN alarm occurred.
Power unit FAN alarm occurred.
FAN#1 alarm occurred.
FAN#2 alarm occurred.
FAN#3 alarm occurred.
FAN#4 alarm occurred.
FAN#5 alarm occurred.
FAN#6 alarm occurred.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-29
SOLVING PROBLEMS
When the server fails to operate as expected, see the following to find out your problem and follow the instruction given
before asking for repair.
If the server still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem, take a note on the on-screen message and
contact your service representative.
Problems with Server
No screen display appears with beep:
•
Are DIMMs installed securely?
→ Check whether DIMMs are connected to the mating connectors firmly.
→ Check whether DIMMs of different specifications are installed in the specific group. See Chapter 9 for
the DIMMs specifications.
Fail to power on the server:
•
Is the server is properly supplied with power?
→ Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet (or UPS) that meets the power specifications
for the server.
→ Make sure to use the power cord provided with the server. Check the power cord for broken shield or
bent plugs.
→ Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on.
→ If the power cord is plugged to a UPS, make sure the UPS is powered and it outputs power. See the
manual that comes with the UPS for details.
Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS setup utility of the
server.
<Menu to check: [Server] - [AC-LINK]>
Did you press the POWER switch?
•
→ Press the POWER switch on the front of the server to turn on the power (the POWER/SLEEP lamp
lights).
Fail to power off the server / SLEEP switch is disabled:
•
Is the POWER switch or SLEEP switch enabled?
→ Restart the server and start the BIOS setup utility.
<Menu to check: [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit]>
Is the server running in the Secure Mode?
•
→ The POWER switch and the SLEEP switch are disabled in the Secure Mode. (Forced shutdown is also
not available.) To release the Secure Mode, enter the password specified with the BIOS setup utility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-30
POST fails to complete:
•
•
•
Is the DIMM board installed?
→ At least four DIMM boards are required for operation.
Is the memory size large?
→ The memory check may take a few seconds if the memory size is large. Wait for a while.
Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the server?
→ If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start-up, POST may accidentally
detect a keyboard controller error and stop proceeding. In such a case, restart the server once again.
Do not perform any keyboard or mouse operation until the BIOS start-up message appears when you
restart the server.
•
Does the server contains appropriate memory boards or PCI devices?
→ Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.
Fail to access to internal or external devices (or such devices fail to operate):
•
•
•
•
Are cables properly connected?
→ Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected. Also make sure that the
cables are connected in the correct order.
Is the power-on order correct?
→ When the server has any external devices connected, power on the external devices first, then the
server.
Did you install drivers for connected optional devices?
→ Some optional devices require specific device drivers. Refer to the manual that comes with the device
to install its driver.
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ When the server has PCI devices connected, make sure to set the PCI device interrupt and others with
the BIOS setup utility of the server. (Most PCI devices generally do not require any change to the
configuration, but some boards do require specific settings. Refer to the manual that comes with the
board for details to make correct settings.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [Advanced Chipset Control] - [PCI Device]>
→ Some devices connected to the serial or parallel port may require I/O port address or operation mode
settings. Refer to the manual that comes with the board for details to make correct settings.
<Menu to check: [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration]>
USB device fail to operate:
•
Did you connect the USB2.0 device to the USB connector on the front panel?
→ The USB connector on the front panel is dedicated to USB1.1. Use the USB connector on the rear
panel to connect the USB2.0 device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-31
Management PC cannot detect the server:
•
Is Java2 Runtime Environment, Standard Edition 1.4.2_04 or later used for management PC?
→ Download Java2 Runtime Environment, Standard Edition 1.4.2_04 or later from
http://java.sun.com/j2se/.
•
Are LAN or ICMB cable properly connected?
→ Make sure that the cable is properly connected to the management LAN port or ICMB port. If the
cables are incorrectly connected, the sensor of the server will not be monitored. Also check if the
cables are connected to LAN connector or serial port connector by mistake.
•
•
Is the IP address unique in the network?
→ The IP address for management LAN port is factory-set to 192.168.1.1. If the same address exists in
the same network, the server will not be detected correctly. Change the IP address appropriately.
Is the server specified to be monitored by ESMPRO Agent?
→ Change setting of ESMPRO Agent.
Start ESMPRO Agent from Windows control panel, select [System] → [Express5800 Server] →
[Monitor]. (The default is [Does not monitor].) Monitoring starts automatically. You do not need to
restart the system, however, reconfiguring the tree may be needed if the server is not detected.
•
Is any error message displayed?
→ See page 4-94 for details.
The server console is not displayed on remote KVM console:
•
Is the resolution correctly set?
→ To display the server console on the remote KVM console, the resolution must be within 1024x768,
and the refresh rate 75Hz. or less.
•
Do you use the remote KVM console in text mode?
→Under Linux, monitor, driver, and video memory settings may fail in graphical display such as
X-Windows. We recommend using Linux in text mode.
Forgotten the login name/password to use the remote management feature through Web browser:
→ If you have forgotten the login name or password, restore the factory default including password by
changing the BMC configuration jumper switch.
IMPORTANT: Restoring the factory default clears BMC configuration that is used for
DianaScope to connect with the server.
If you are using DianaScope, you need to save the configuration data into a floppy disk
before clearing password.
BMC can be configured and saved with DianaScope Agent and the system management
feature of EXPRESSBUILDER.
1. Power off the server and unplug the power cord.
2. Change the BMC configuration jumper switch setting as shown below. (See Chapter 4 for details.)
Factory-set jumper switch location
Jumper switch location for clearing password
3. Connect the power cord.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-32
4. Wait at least 30 seconds with the power being off, then unplug the power cord.
5. Restore the BMC configuration jumper switch setting and power on the server for reconfiguration.
The keyboard or mouse fails to operate:
•
•
•
Is the cable properly connected?
→ Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the server.
→ The keyboard or mouse does not operate if it is connected when the server is powered (not applicable
to USB devices). Power off the server first and connect it properly.
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The keyboard and mouse may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server. Check the settings
with the BIOS setup utility.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] - [PS/2 Mouse], [Advanced] - [Numlock]>
Are the server drivers installed?
→ Refer to the manual that comes with your operating system to check that the keyboard and mouse
drivers are installed. (These drivers are installed along with the operating system.) Some operating
systems allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings. Refer to manual that comes with your
operating system to check that the keyboard and mouse settings are correct.
•
Is the server in the Secure Mode?
→ In the Secure Mode, the keyboard and mouse are disabled. To release the Secure Mode, enter the
password specified with the BIOS setup utility.
Fail to access (read or write) to the floppy disk:
•
•
•
Does the floppy disk drive contain a floppy disk?
→ Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive until it clicks.
Is the floppy disk write-protected?
→ Place the write-protect switch on the floppy disk to the "Write-enabled" position.
Is the floppy disk formatted?
→ Use a formatted floppy disk or format the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive. Refer to the manual
that comes with the operating system for formatting a floppy disk.
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The floppy disk drive may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server. Check the setting with
the BIOS setup utility.
<Menus to check:
[Main] - [Legacy Floppy A]
[Security] - [Floppy Write Protect]>
Is the server in the Secure Mode?
•
→ In the Secure Mode, write access to the floppy disk may be disabled. To release the Secure Mode,
enter the password specified with the BIOS setup utility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-33
Fail to access to the CD-ROM:
•
Is the CD-ROM properly set in the CD-ROM drive tray?
→ The tray is provided with a holder to secure the CD-ROM. Make sure that the CD-ROM is placed
properly in the holder.
•
Is the CD-ROM applicable to the server?
→ A CD-ROM for Macintosh is not available for use.
Fail to access to the CD-R disk:
•
•
Is the mounting surface correct?
→ Take out the CD-R disk from the tray, and then set it again with its labelled surface upward.
Is there any soil or crack on CD-R disk?
→ Make sure there is no soil due to fingerprint or others on the disk surface. Also make sure that there is
no crack on the disk surface. Clean the disk surface if it is soiled.
If read-out still fails, set another disk of which data has been successfully read out to check if the drive
can read the disk.
•
•
Is the CD-R disk closed?
→ Close the session or set the disk in closed status, and try to read again.
Are the CD-R disk and writing software appropriate to the disk drive?
→ The CD-ROM drive of the server may fail if the combination of disk drive, writing software, and
CD-R is not correct.
Inserted the correct CD-ROM but the message like the following is displayed:
The CD-ROM is not inserted or the wrong CD-ROM is inserted.
Please insert the correct CD-ROM.
OK
•
Is the data side of the CD-ROM dirty or scratched?
→ Take the CD-ROM out of the CD-ROM drive, confirm that it is not dirty or injured, reset and click
[OK].
Fail to access the hard disk:
(Refer to the documentation supplied with the disk array controller.)
•
•
Is the hard disk applicable to the server?
→ Operation of any device that is not authorized by us is not guaranteed.
Is the hard disk properly installed?
→ Make sure to lock the hard disk with the lever on its handle. The hard disk is not connected to the
internal connector when it is not completely installed (see Chapter 9).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-34
Fail to access the (internal or external) SCSI devices:
•
•
Is the SCSI device applicable to the server?
→ Operation of any SCSI device that is not authorized by us is not guaranteed.
Is the cable connection changed?
→ The SCSI connector (B) on the I/O board in the machine can be used for either built-in file devices or
external SCSI devices. The connection to external devices must be switched by modifying cable
connection properly.
•
•
Are SCSI devices properly configured?
→ When the server has external SCSI devices connected, device settings, including SCSI ID and
terminator, are required. Refer to the manual that comes with the SCSI device for details.
Are the SCSI controllers (including optional controllers) properly configured?
→ Use the BIOS setup utility for proper configuration of SCSI devices connected to the SCSI connector
on the I/O board. When the server has an optional SCSI controller installed and SCSI devices
connected to it, use the BIOS setup utility that comes with the optional SCSI controller for proper
configuration. See the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-35
Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you install Windows Server 2003 x64
Editions.
Source:
DCOM
Error
Category
Event ID
10016
Description: The application-specific permission settings do not grant Local Activation permission for the
COM server application with CLSID {555F3418-D99E-4E51-800A-6E89CFD8B1D7} to the
user {NT AUTHORITY\LOCAL SERVICE} SID {S-1-5-19}.
This security permission can be modified using the component Services administrative tool.
→ It is not a problem in operating the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-36
Problems with Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000
Cannot install the operating system correctly.
•
Did you confirm the notes on installing the operating system?
→ See Chapter 6.
During Windows 2000 installation, the following warning is registered in the System Log of the Event Viewer:
Error detected on the device \Device\CdRom0 during the paging
operation.
→ There is no problem on this issue.
Fail to start the operating system:
•
•
•
Is a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive?
→ Take out the floppy disk and restart the server.
Is the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive?
→ Take out the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and restart the server.
Is the operating system broken?
→ Use recovery process to recover the system.
(See "Recovery for Windows 2000" in this Chapter.)
The event log after every logon to Windows 2000 includes the following error log:
Description (D)
The CPUs in this multiprocessor system are not all the same revision level.
To use all processors the operating system restricts itself to the features of
the least capable processor in the system. Should problems occur with
this system, contact the CPU manufacture to see if this mix of processors
is supported.
•
Has the processor been expanded?
→ If different revisions (steppings) of the processors are installed in a multiprocessor system, Windows
2000 logs the above information every startup. If this message is logged, it is no problem for
operation.
The operating system presents unstable operation:
•
Did you update the system?
→ Installing a network drive after installation of the operating system may cause unstable operation. Use
the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to update the system. (See Chapter 6.)
When any trouble occurred, the system does not run according to the specification of "Restart automatically":
→ When any trouble occurred on Windows 2000, the system may not restart automatically even if
"Restart automatically" is specified. In such case, restart the system manually.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-37
Cannot turn the power OFF at the blue screen:
→ If you want to turn off the power at the blue screen, execute forced power off (forced shut down:
continue to press POWER switch for 4 seconds). The power will not be turned off if you press the
switch just one time.
The server is not found on the network:
•
Is the LAN cable connected?
→ Make sure to connect the LAN cable to the network port on the rear of the server. Also make sure that
the LAN cable to use conforms to the network interface standard.
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server. Check the
setting with the BIOS setup utility.
<Menus to check:
[Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Embedded NIC 1], [Embedded NIC 2]>
Have the protocol and service already be configured?
•
•
→ Install the distinctive network driver for the server. Make sure that the protocol, such as TCP/IP, and
services are properly specified.
Is the transfer speed correct?
→ Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the "Link Speed & Duplex" value
the same as the value specified for the HUB.
The processor name displayed in [General] tab of [System Property] is not in correct position.
→ There is no problem for operation.
The system displays the message below and fails to log in.
→ In Windows Server 2003, the following message will be displayed if you use the operating system
without executing the license authentication. Select "Yes", and execute the procedure for license
authentication.
Windows Product Activation
This copy of Windows must be activated with Microsoft before you can
continue, You cannot log on until you activate Windows.
Do you want to activate Windows now?
To shut down the computer, click Cancel.
YES
NO
Cancel
Unable to update the system:
•
Are you trying to update the system without applying Service Pack or with Service Pack 1, 2, or 3?
→ Without applying Service Pack and applying Service Pack 1, 2, or 3 to this system are not supported.
You have to apply Service Pack 4 to update the system.
If you use Windows 2000 CD-ROM which includes Service Pack 4 to install Windows 2000 on your
system, you do not have to apply Service Pack 4 again when you update the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-38
About System Log when re-starting the system on Windows Server 2003
Type:
Source:
Event ID:
Warning
E100B
4
Description: Adapter Intel(R) PRO/100 Network Connection: Adapter Link Down
→ When re-starting the system without connecting the network cable, this log may be found in system
event log.
But this has no effect on the behaviour of LAN driver.
Confirm that the system is connected with the LAN cable properly.
If 100Base LAN port is not used, disable 100Base LAN on device manager or disable it on BIOS
configuration. Then, the log will not be registered.
Event logs in using SNMP Service in Windows Server 2003
Event Type:
Warning
Event Source: EvntAgnt
Event Category: None
Event ID:
1015
Description:
TraceLevel parameter not located in registry;
Default trace level used is 32.
Event Type:
Warning
Event Source: EvntAgnt
Event Category: None
Event ID:
1003
Description:
TraceFileName parameter not located in registry;
Default trace file used is .
→ The system will not be affected by these event logs. SNMP will not be affected either, so that you can
ignore these logs.
A PCI board is not recognized.
•
•
•
Is the PCI board installed correctly?
→ Confirm that the PCI board is installed in the slot correctly.
Is the proper IRQ assigned for the board?
→ Assign the proper IRQ by referring to Chapter 4.
Is "Disabled" specified in [Option ROM] for the slot to install SCSI card (excluding the array board used
for operating system boot)?
→ Check the settings with the BIOS setup utility.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [PCI Slot n] (n: PCI slot number of installed
board) - [Option ROM Scan]>
•
Is "Disabled" specified in [Option ROM] for the slot for added network board which is not used for
network boot?
→ Check the settings with the BIOS setup utility.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [PCI Slot n] (n: PCI slot number of installed
board) - [Option ROM Scan]>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-39
PCI hot-plug fails:
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ You must change the BIOS configuration to use the PCI hot-plug feature.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Hot Plug PCI Control] -
[Minimum/Middle/Maximum*]>
*
Setting value depends on the board to be installed. See Chapter 4 for details.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Hot Plug PCI Control] - [Empty Bus Default
Speed] - [PCI Slots 5-6] or [PCI Slots 7-8] - Transfer speed of the board to be installed>
The driver of a PCI board cannot be stopped from the operating system when Hot Remove or Hot Replace is
executed for the PCI board:
•
Is another software application using the PCI board for which Hot Remove or Hot Replace is to be
executed?
→ If another software application is using the PCI board for which Hot Remove or Hot Replace is to be
executed, the driver of the PCI board cannot be stopped.
Terminate the software, then stop the driver of the PCI board. If executing Hot Replace, restart the
software after having mounted a new PCI board.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-40
Problems with EXPRESSBUILDER
When the server is not booted from the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM, check the following:
•
Did you insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM during POST and restart the server?
→ If you do not insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM during POST and restart the server, an error
message will appear or the operating system will boot.
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS setup utility of the server. Use the BIOS setup
utility to change the boot device order to boot the system from the CD-ROM drive first.
<Menu to check: [Boot]>
•
Is an error message appeared?
→ When an error occurs while EXPRESSBUILDER is in progress, one of the following messages
appears.
After this message appears, check the error and take the appropriate corrective action according to the
message listed in the table below.
Message
Cause and Remedy
This machine is not supported.
This EXPRESSBUILDER version is not designed for this
server. Execute EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant server.
NVRAM access error.
An access to the non-volatile memory (NVRAM) is not
acceptable.
Hard disk access error.
The hard disk is not connected or it is failed.
Check whether the hard disk is correctly connected.
The system-specific information does not exist on
the I/O board.
The system-specific information cannot be acquired in the I/O
board exchange and so on.
Please restore the backup data or write the data by
using [System Information Management] of the
Off-line Maintenance Utility.
Only the authorized personnel are allowed to do this
operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-41
Problems with Express Setup
Express Setup can not be used
→ Express Setup does not support the installation of Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.
If you want to perform re-setup, see Appendix D and perform "Manual Setup".
Following message appeared when you tried to install Express Setup to the hard disk that has smaller capacity
than the specified partition size:
The specified partition size has exceeded the capacity of the hard disk.
The setup created the partition at the maximum size that can be reserved on the hard disk.
Setup will continue the process.
OK
→ It is not an abnormal condition. Press Enter to continue the installation.
The message can not be displayed correctly when copying the files from CD-ROM or checking CD-ROM:
→ Press R. When any messages appear again even if you press R, restart the Express Setup from the
beginning. In case the same result occurred after the restart of installation, contact your service
representative and ask them to check the CD-ROM drive.
Express Setup terminated and asks to input setup information.
→ There are some errors on the specified setup information.
Follow the instruction to input the correct value. It is not necessary to cancel the installation. On
Windows 2000, you might be asked to press Enter again after the last reboot of the setup.
[Complete] appears on the [Role of Computer] screen.
→ If you click [Complete] here, the setup will select the default value of Express Setup for the later
specification to continue the process.
<The Default Value for Windows 2000>
The specification of network protocol
Protocol :
Service :
Client :
TCP/IP[DHCP Specified]
Select sharing Microsoft network files and printer.
Microsoft network client.
Component :
Application :
SNMP, IIS (Excluding Professional/Windows Server 2003)
ESMPRO Agent
Power Console Plus (When disk array system)
[Complete] does not appear on [Role of Computer] screen.
→ [Complete] does not appear if the setup information file that has already been created is loaded.
→ [Complete] appears only when you first entered the [Role of Computer] screen.
Once you go to the next screen from [Role of Computer], the [Complete] will not appear even if you enter
[Back] to go back to the [Role of Computer] screen.
Select [Use Existing Array] at [New/Existing RAID Configuration], but the operating system is installed in the
whole area of the disk.
→ Is there any other partition than the partition to re-use (excluding maintenance area)? If no other partition
than the one to re-use exist, the setup will reserve the whole area of the disk to install Windows 2000.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-42
Specified to join the Domain, but the system is installed as Workgroup.
→ When the setup fails to join the Domain during the installation, it will install the system as Workgroup.
Open [System] in Control Panel to specify joining the Domain.
Specified large value as partition size, but when Windows 2000 is actually started, the system partition is created
by 4095 MB.
→ Is the [Partition Size] specified by the value larger than the real area? If you want to create one partition
in all area of the hard disk (excluding the maintenance area) to install the operating system, specify [All
Area].
Windows 2000 started with different display resolution from the specified value.
→ If the specified display resolution can not be used, the system will use the nearest value or the default
value of the driver.
Entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key.
→ Even if you entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key, Express Setup will start. However, the setup will
stop and asks you to re-enter the correct value. Also in this case, input request will occur when rebooting
after GUI setup completed during Express Setup. If these 2 inputs are done correctly, there is no problem
on Windows 2000 setup.
Unable to specify the details of network adapter.
→ In Express Setup, you can not specify the details of Network adapter. Specify them from Control Panel
after starting Windows 2000.
Windows 2000 is started with network adapter that has not been specified during Express Setup
→ Windows 2000 will install the recognized network adapter specified as default value. If you want to
modify the specification, it can be done from Control Panel after starting Windows 2000. Also, a network
adapter that has been specified during Express Setup but is not connected will not be setup, though the
protocol will only be installed.
Connected more than two network adapters and specified a different protocol for each adapter, but all the
protocols are specified on either adapter.
→ It's a design. Each adapter is specified so that all the installed protocols can be used.
The values that cannot be specified during Express Setup will all be specified by default value.
When more than two network adapters are specified, the detailed specification of TCP/IP protocol are all set to
use DHCP.
→ When more than two network adapters are specified, the detailed specification of the protocol may all be
set by default value. Re-specify the details from Control Panel.
Not more than two network adapters are connected, but the detailed specification of the protocol are all set by
default. (e.g. Specified IP Address on TCP/IP, but DHCP is specified)
→ Are you specifying more than two protocols?
In this case, the situation will be the same as connecting more than two Network adapter, so the detailed
specification of the protocol are all set by default.
Re-specify the details from Control Panel after starting the operating system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-43
Changed the giga driver speed from 1000M bps to 100M bps. But the changed speed is not properly displayed in
Network Details of ESMPRO data viewer (still 1000M bps is indicated):
→ It does not affect the operation of LAN driver.
Setup is interrupted at "Creating a working partition" process during the Express Setup.
•
Did you connect the hard disk drive that operating system is not going to be installed on?
→ Disconnect the hard disk drive that operating system is not going to be installed on, and perform the
Express Setup.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-44
Error Message during Disk Array Configuration
Refer to the manual that comes with the disk array controller for any trouble occurred on disk array in this system.
The operating system cannot be installed:
•
Is configuration of the disk array controller performed?
→ Perform configuration properly by using MegaRAID Configuration Utility.
The operating system cannot be started:
•
Is the BIOS setting for the disk array controller changed?
→ Set it properly by using MegaRAID Configuration Utility.
Does POST recognize the disk array controller?
•
→ Check that the disk array controller is connected correctly and then turn the power ON.
→ When the disk array is connected correctly but is not recognized, it may be faulty. Contact the
maintenance service agent that you are contracted with or the dealer that you purchased this controller
from.
Rebuilding cannot be performed:
•
Is the capacity of the hard disk to be rebuilt insufficient?
→ Use a hard disk of the same capacity as the faulty one.
•
Is the RAID configuration RAID0?
→ RAID0 does not have redundancy thus rebuilding cannot be performed. Replace the "DEAD" hard
disk, create configuration information again, perform initialization and then restore using the backup
data.
Auto-rebuild cannot be performed:
•
Is the interval enough when hot swap are executed?
→ Take interval more than 90 seconds when hot swap are executed.
•
Is the BIOS setting for the disk array controller correct?
→ Check the BIOS setting for disk array controller by using MegaRAID Configuration Utility. Select
"Objects" → "Adapter" → "Auto Rebuild" from the TOP menu.
A hard disk goes into "FAIL" status:
→ Contact the maintenance service agent that you are contracted with or the dealer that you purchased it
from.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-45
Problems with Master Control Menu
The master control menu fails to appear:
•
•
•
Is your system Windows NT 4.0 or later, or Windows 95 or later?
→ The Master Control menu is supported by Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 95.
Is Shift pressed?
→ Setting the CD-ROM with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature.
Is the system in the proper state?
→ The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the timing to set the CD-ROM.
In such a case, start the Explorer and run \MC\1ST.EXE in the CD-ROM.
Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator
<Common to Windows 2000>
The bit map of the Configuration Diskette Creator window is not displayed correctly during setting of
setup information. (When the Trekking command is used)
→ If the specified number of colours is fewer than 256 in the display setting, the bit map is not displayed
correctly, but the setup information can be displayed correctly.
The Point to Point tunnelling protocol cannot be set.
→ The protocol is not supported at present. After installation, set the protocol through Control Panel. In this
case, rebooting is not necessary.
The details of a network adapter cannot be set.
→ Configuration Diskette Creator is unable to set the details of network adapters. Start Windows 2000, and
set the details through Control Panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-46
COLLECTING EVENT LOG
This section describes how to collect the log of various events that occurred on the server.
IMPORTANT: If STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow the procedure below
after restarting the system.
NOTE: Different revisions of processors may be mixed in the additional processor kit.
When Windows 2000 is used, following message may be appeared in the System Log of the
Event Viewer after extension of different revisions of two or more processors in the Express
server. If this message is logged, it is no problem for operation.
1. Click [Management Tool] → [Event Viewer] from the Control Panel.
2. Select the type of the log to collect.
On [Application Log], the events related to the running application are archived. On [Security Log], the
events related to the security are archived. On [System Log], the events occurred at the item which configures
Windows 2000 system are archived.
3. Click [Save as...] in the [Run] menu.
4. Type the file name of archived log in the [File Name] box.
5. Select the type of the log file you want to save in the [File Type] list box and click [OK].
For more information, refer to Windows 2000 Online Help.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-47
COLLECT CONFIGURATION INFORMATION
This section describes how to collect the information on hardware configuration and inside specification.
In order to collect information, "Diagnostic Program" is used.
IMPORTANT: If STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow the procedure below
after restarting the system.
1. Point to [Settings] in Start menu, and click [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.
2. Double-click [Management Tool], and double-click [Computer Management].
The [Computer Management] dialog box appears.
3. Click [System Tool] → [System Information].
4. Click [Save as System Information File] in the [Operation] menu.
5. Type the file name to save in the [File Name] box.
6. Click [Save].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-48
COLLECTING DR. WATSON DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
Dr. Watson collects diagnostic information related to application errors. The location to save the information can be
specified as you like. For more information, refer to Chapter 5.
MEMORY DUMP
If an error occurs, the dump file should be saved to acquire necessary information.
If you saved the dump to DAT, write down that it is saved as "NTBackup" or "ARCServe" on the label. You can specify
the location to save the diagnostic information as you like. For more information, refer to "Specifying Memory Dump
(Debug Information (refer to Chapter 5 for detail)".
IMPORTANT:
Contact your service representative before dumping the memory. Dumping the memory
while the server is in the successful operation may affect the system operation.
Restarting the system due to an error may display a message indicating insufficient
virtual memory. Ignore this message and proceed. Restarting the system may result in
dumping improper data.
Preparing for Memory Dumping
Memory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart. In such a case, it is required to force the
server to shut down. This forced shutdown, however, is not available if "Enable" is selected for "Power Switch Inhibit"
on the Security menu of the BIOS setup utility, because this setting disables POWER switch operation.
Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown and restart of the server.
1. Power on the server and start the BIOS setup utility.
2. Select "Disable" for "Power Switch Inhibit" in the Security menu.
3. Save the configuration data and exit the SETUP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-49
Saving the Dump File
Press the DUMP switch to save the dump file when an error occurs. Insert a metal pin (a straightened large paper clip
will make a substitute) into the switch hole to press the DUMP switch.
DUMP switch
Pressing the DUMP switch saves the dump file in the specified directory. (Memory dumping may not be available when
the processor stalls.)
IMPORTANT: Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break. Use a pin
having the length of 1 inch (25 mm) or longer.
25 mm or longer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-50
RECOVERY FOR Windows 2000 SYSTEM
If any file necessary for running the operating system is damaged, use the following procedures to recover the system.
IMPORTANT:
After recovering the system, see "Updating the System" in Chapter 5 and be sure to
update the system.
Also on Windows 2000, you need to update all the drivers after the system update. For
more information, see "Installing and Setting Device Drivers" in Chapter 5.
If the hard disk can not be recognised, you can not recover the system.
Follow the procedure below and use the information in the disk, not system recovery disk, to recover the system.
1. Turn on the power of the system.
2. Insert Windows 2000 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your server.
3. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot the server. (You may also turn off and then
on again to reboot the server.)
4. Press F6 while the message "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration..." is displayed at the
upper part of the screen.
NOTE: Nothing is changed on the screen when F6 is pressed.
5. Press S when the following message appears:
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your
system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage device(s).
Select [Other] and press Enter.
6. Insert Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and press Enter.
Please insert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
* Press ENTER when ready.
Select the [LSI MEGARAID Products for Windows 2000] and press Enter.
7. Press R to select the recovery option.
8. If you are requested, press R to select system recovery procedure.
9. If you are requested, select either of the procedure below:
[Manual Recovery] (Press M)
Do not select this option unless you are a high-level user or a system administrator. If you use this option,
you can recover the problems of system files, partition boot sector, and start-up environment.
[Quick Recovery] (Press F)
This option is very easy to use and the user does not need to do anything during the procedure. If you
select this option, the system recovery disk program starts to recover the problems concerning system
files, partition boot sector of system disk, and start-up environment (if multiple operating systems are
installed on the system).
10. Follow the on-screen instructions, and then press L at the screen which request you to insert system recovery
disk. The system will be restarted once.
NOTE: Start the procedure without system recovery disk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-51
11. Repeat steps 4 to 9.
The recovery procedure will be started.
During the recovery, the missing files and the damaged files are replaced either to the files in C:\ I386 folder
of hard disk or the files in systemroot\ Repair of the system partition. These replaced files do not reflect the
changes of the configuration after the setup at all.
12. Follow the instruction displayed on the screen.
If you take a note of any file name in which trouble is detected during the procedure, it is useful to diagnose
how the system has been damaged.
13. Terminates the procedure if the recovery is successful.
You can verify that the replaced files are correctly copied to the hard disk if the computer is restarted
normally.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-52
OFF-LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is an operating system independent maintenance program. When you are unable to
start the operating system dependent ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem, the Off-line Maintenance Utility can be used.
IMPORTANT:
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is intended for use by your service representative. The
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable floppy
disk you have created contain a file that describes operation of the utility, but do not
attempt to use the utility by yourself. Contact your service representative and follow
instructions.
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility disables any access from a client to the server.
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility may be started in the following ways.
From the CD-ROM
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and reboot the system.
After the menu is displayed on the screen, select "Tools" - "Off-line Maintenance Utility".
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the CD-ROM.
From the floppy disk
Insert the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable floppy disk in the floppy disk drive and reboot the system.
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the boot disk.
The Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable floppy disk is created by selecting "Tools" - "Create Support FD"
on the EXPRESSBUILDER.
Manual start (by pressing F4)
When the Off-line Maintenance Utility is installed, press F4 while the start-up screen of the server is on
screen. The Off-line Maintenance Utility starts from the hard disk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-53
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility provides the following features. (Available features vary depending on the way you
started the Off-line Maintenance Utility.)
IMPORTANT: See the on-line help for details of the Off-line Maintenance Utility. For
further information, ask your service representative.
IPMI Information Viewer
Provides the functions to view the system event log (SEL), sensor data record (SDR), and field replaceable
unit (FRU) and to make a backup copy of them.
Using this feature, you can find system errors and events to determine a maintenance part.
BIOS Setup Viewer
Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the Setup utility to a text file.
System Information Viewer
Provides the functions to view information on the processor and the BIOS and export it to a text file.
System Information Management
Provides the function to make a back-up copy of your data.
Without the backup data, the system-specific information and/or configuration may not be restored.
Only an authorised person is allowed to restore the backup data.
Start of Utilities
With EXPRESSBUILDER, you can start the following utilities installed in the maintenance partition.
–
–
–
System Management
System Diagnostics
Maintenance Partition Update
Chassis Identify
This function can distinguish the machine with the lamp or buzzer of the machine.
This is convenient if you have to distinguish a machine among many machines on the rack.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-54
RESETTING THE SERVER
If the server halts before starting the operating system, press and hold Ctrl and Alt and press Delete.
This restarts the server.
Pressing the RESET switch on the front panel reboots the server.
RESET switch
IMPORTANT: Resetting the server clears the DIMM memory and the data in process. To
reset the server when it is not frozen, make sure that no processing is in progress.
FORCED SHUTDOWN
Use this function when an operating system command does not shut down the server, the POWER switch does not turn
off the server, or resetting does not work.
Press and hold the POWER switch on the server for at least four seconds. The power is forcibly turned off. To turn on
the power back again, wait approximately 10 seconds after turning off the power (forced shutdown).
Press and hold the
POWER switch at least 4
seconds.
IMPORTANT: If the remote power-on function is used, cycle the power once to load the
operating system, and turn off the power again in the normal way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Upgrading Your Server
This chapter describes internal optional devices available for the server, procedures for install or removing such
optional devices, and notes on using them.
IMPORTANT:
Optional devices described in this chapter may be installed or removed by any user.
However, we do not assume any liability for damage to optional devices or the server or
malfunctions of the server resulted from installation by the user. We recommend you
ask your service representative for installing or removing any optional devices.
Make sure to use only optional devices and cables authorised by us. Repair of the server
due to malfunctions, failures, or damage resulting from installing inappropriate devices
or cables will be charged.
When you made any change to the hardware configuration, make sure to update the
system (see Chapter 5 for details.).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2
SAFETY NOTES
Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.
Do not remove the lithium, Ni-CD, and/or NiMH battery.
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not lift the server only by a single person.
Make sure to complete board installation.
Do not pinch your fingers with mechanical component.
High temperature
Put a connector cover on an unused connector.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3
ANTI-STATIC MEASURES
The server contains electronic components sensitive to static electricity. Avoid failures caused by static electricity when
installing or removing any optional devices.
Wear a wrist strap (an arm belt or anti-static glove).
Wear a wrist strap on your wrist. If no wrist strap is available, touch an unpainted metal part of the cabinet
before touching a component to discharge static electricity from your body.
Touch a metal part regularly when working with components to discharge static electricity.
Select a suitable work space.
– Work with the server on an anti-static or concrete floor.
– When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be generated, make sure take
anti-static measures beforehand.
Use a work table.
Place the server on an anti-static mat to work with it.
Cloth
– Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server.
– Wear anti-static shoes to work with the server.
– Take off any jewels (ring, bracelet, or wrist watch) before working with the server.
Handling of components
– Keep any component in an anti-static bag until you actually install it into the server.
– Hold a component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or components.
– To store or carry any component, place it in an anti-static bag.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
Follow the procedure below to prepare for installing or removing components.
1. Shut down the operating system.
2. Press the POWER switch to power off the server (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).
3. Unplug the power cord from the AC inlet on the server
The AC Standby lamp on the front of the server goes off.
4. Remove all the cables connected to the server on the rear panel.
5. Make a clearance of 1m to 2m in the front and rear sides and left and right sides of the server.
NOTE: Make sure to disconnect the power cord from the outlet before installing or
removing the option devices. If you remove the internal cable with the power cord being
connected, the STATUS lamp will light in amber when the server is powered. Disconnect
the power cord, connect it again, and then restart the server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-5
DEVICE INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL PROCEDURE
Install or remove a component from the server as follows.
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive
The 3.5-inch device bay on the front of the server contains five slots in which hard disk drives can be installed. The
device bay is not equipped with any hard disk drives (excluding when one or more built-in hard disk drives are ordered).
Purchase additional hard disk drives if required.
IMPORTANT:
Do not use any hard disk drives that are not authorised by us. Installing a third-party's
hard disk drive may cause a failure of the server as well as the hard disk drive.
The supported RAID level depends on the disk array controller to be used.
–
Onboard RAID:
RAID0, RAID1, and RAID5 (See "Disk Array Configuration" in this chapter.)
–
Optional disk array controller:
Refer to the manual that comes with the disk array controller. (If you purchased the
board by BTO (built-to-order), the manual is provided with the server.)
All five slots may contain a hard disk drive approximately 25.4 mm (1 inch) high. The SCSI IDs ID0 through ID4 are
always assigned to hard disk drives as shown below.
ID0
ID1
ID0
ID2
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID3
ID4
ID8
ID9
ID10
ID11
HDD cage (option)
The 3.5-inch disk bay cable is connected between the SCSI (Ch-A) connector and the hard disk drives cage on the I/O
board when the server is shipped.
To use the hard disk drives in a disk array configuration by using the on-board RAID controller, you do not need to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6
change cable connection. However, to use the hard disk drives in a disk array configuration using the optional RAID
controller, you need to use a separately priced SCSI cable. Remove the cable that is connected between the SCSI Ch-A
connector and the hard disk drives cage, and connect the separately priced SCSI cable to the connector between the hard
disk drives cage and the disk array controller.
In the disk array configuration, use the same model of hard disk drives.
Installation
Install a hard disk drive as follows. This procedure applies to all the slots.
NOTE: In RAID1 or RAID5 configuration, the hard disk drive can be installed or removed
while the server is being powered.
IMPORTANT: In a disk array configuration, use the same model of hard disk drives.
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare (except for disk array
configuration).
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3. Locate the slot in which you are going to install a hard disk drive.
The server has five slots. The SCSI IDs assigned to the slots are all determined (SCSI ID 0 to ID 4 from right
to left).
4. Remove the empty drive carrier.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-7
5. Using the provided screws, secure the hard disk drive into the empty drive carrier.
6. Firmly hold the additional hard disk drive and handle, and insert it into the slot.
IMPORTANT:
Push the hard disk drive until the handle hook hits the frame.
Carefully hold the hard disk drive with both hands.
7. Slowly close the handle.
The handle is locked when a "click" is heard.
NOTE: Make sure that the handle is hooked to the frame when having inserted the hard
disk drive.
8. Close the front door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-8
Removal
Remove a hard disk drive as follows. To use the server with the hard disk drive removed, insert an empty drive carrier
into the empty slot.
1. Shutdown the system and press the POWER switch to turn off the power.
2. Unlock the hard disk drive.
1
2
3. Firmly hold the hard disk drive and handle, then take them out.
NOTE: If removing a failing hard disk drive, confirm the slot in which the DISK lamp of
the hard disk drive is amber before starting the removal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-9
DISK lamps
When the hard disk drives are in the disk array configuration, you can restore the state before an error using the
auto-rebuild feature that stores the data in the old hard disk drive into a new one.
The auto-rebuild feature may be enabled or disabled depending on the RAID level.
Auto-rebuild is automatically carried out when you hot-swap a failed hard disk drive with a new one (replace the disk
while the server is powered). While auto-rebuild is in progress, the DISK lamp flashes green and amber alternatively to
indicate it.
IMPORTANT: When auto-rebuild fails, the DISK lamp lights in amber. Remove and
install the hard disk drive again to restart auto-rebuild. (If the disk array monitoring utility
is installed, check the indication of the utility.)
Observe the following notes for auto-rebuild.
Do not power off the server in the period between a hard disk drive error and completion of auto-rebuild.
When you removed a hard disk drive, wait at least 90 seconds before installing the hard disk drive back again.
Do not replace another hard disk drive while rebuilding is in progress. (The DISK lamp flashes green and
amber alternatively while rebuilding the hard disk drive.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-10
Power Supply Unit
Even if one of three power supply units fails, the server can continue its operation without interruption when an
additional power supply unit is installed (in the redundant configuration).
If the four power supply units are used, AC power can be divided into two lines with a pair of power supply units. With
the AC power redundant configuration, the server can continue its operation without power interruption even if either of
AC power line fails.
Installation
Install a power supply unit as follows:
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2. Remove the screw securing the blank cover.
3. Remove the blank cover.
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed blank cover for future use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-11
4. Insert the power supply unit into the slot.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to push straight the power supply unit. To avoid damaging the
power supply unit, do not tilt or twist the unit as you push it into the connector.
NOTE: Make sure that the power supply unit is pushed in to an end securely.
5. Connect two power cords to AC inlet.
Use the power cord provided with the power supply unit and the one provided with the optional unit.
IMPORTANT: A blank cover is attached to the slot for additional power supply unit.
Keep the removed blank cover for future use.
AC inlet
AC inlet for additional
power supply unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12
6. Power on the server.
The POWER lamp on the power supply units goes on.
7. Confirm, by the STATUS lamp or on the POST diagnostic screen, that there are no errors related to the power
supply units.
See Chapter 8 for details on the error messages.
If the POWER lamps are off, reinstall the power supply units. If the POWER lamps are still off, contact your
service representative.
Replacing a Failing Power Supply Unit
Replace only a failing power supply unit.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove a power supply unit operating normally.
NOTE: If two power supply units work normally while the server contains three or four
power supply units in a redundant configuration, the failing power supply unit can be
replaced with the system operating (power-on state). (Skip step 2.)
1. Check the POWER lamp on the power supply unit and determine which unit needs to be replaced.
The lamp of the failing power supply unit is off.
2. Shutdown the system, and turn off the server.
3. While pressing down on the locking tab, grasp the handle and carefully pull the power supply unit out of the
power supply bay.
IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the power supply unit and/or connector, do not tilt or
twist the unit as you pull it from the power supply bay. Use even, steady force to remove
the unit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-13
4. If you are not going to install a replacement power supply unit, you must install a blank cover you removed in
step 2 of installation procedure to vacant slot.
IMPORTANT: To maintain the cooling effect in the server, install the blank cover in the
vacant slot of the power supply bay.
5. Install the new power supply unit taking steps 3 to 6 of "Installation", and confirm that the power supply unit
is installed normally.
NOTE: If one of the three or four power supply units of the server is replaced while the
power is on, the POWER lamp of the new power supply unit goes on. (If it is replaced
while the power is off, the lamp goes on after the power is turned on.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-14
5.25-inch Device
The server contains two slots in which SCSI backup devices such as magnetic tape drive can be installed.
Slot #2
Slot #1
Available Devices
The 5.25-inch device slot can contain two single-height SCSI devices, or one full-height device.
To connect the 5.25-inch device with the on-board SCSI controller, connect the SCSI cable mounted on the
5.25-inch device bay to "Ch-B" of SCSI connector on I/O board. In this case, assign the SCSI ID between 0
and 6 for the device to be installed. Set the terminator to "Disabled".
If the "Ch-B" of SCSI connector on I/O board is connected to the additional HDD cage, connect the 5.25-inch
device to the optional SCSI controller board.
Setting of SCSI ID
When connecting the 5.25-inch device with the SCSI connector (Ch-B) on I/O board, set the SCSI ID 0 through 6.
When connecting the 5.25-inch device with the optional SCSI controller, refer to the manual that comes with the SCSI
controller.
Setting of terminator
Set the terminator to "OFF".
Installation
Described below are installation procedures for both IDE device and SCSI device.
For SCSI device, procedures for connecting the device to SCSI connector "Ch-B" on I/O board are explained here. To
connect it to the optional SCSI controller board, see "Cable Connection" described later.
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2. Open the front door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-15
3. Pull the dummy cover toward you gently and carefully.
4. Pull the SCSI cable and power cable out of the 5.25-inch device bay.
5. Install the two latching rails coming with the server to the device with the screw (PL-CPIMSx3x6x15BF)
provided with the server.
IMPORTANT: Always use the screws coming with the server. Do not use the screws
coming with the 5.25-inch device. Using longer screws or those of different diameter may
cause the device to be broken.
NOTE: Use the lower screw holes to secure the rail to the device.
Screws
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-16
6. Connect the interface cable.
Connect the SCSI and power cables secured in the 5.25-inch device bay to the 5.25-inch device.
IMPORTANT: A connector cap is attached to the power cable. Keep the removed cap for
future use.
7. Push the 5.25-inch device to the device bay carefully until a click occurs to lock it.
IMPORTANT:
If the SCSI connector "Ch-B" is connected to the additional HDD cage, install the
optional SCSI controller board to connect with the 5.25-inch device.
Connector pin bending or incomplete connection may cause a malfunction to occur.
Provide the connection securely watching the 5.25-inch device and cable connectors.
NOTE: Make sure that the cable is not caught.
8. Close the front door.
9. Provide the setup for the SCSI controller.
If the 5.25-inch device is connected to optional SCSI controller board, refer to the manual that comes with the
SCSI controller board for setup.
Removal
Remove the 5.25-inch device in the reverse procedure of the installation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-17
Rear Access Cover
To install or remove a PCI board, or to change cable connections of internal SCSI cable, you will need to remove the
rear access cover.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Be sure to power off the server before removing the rear access cover.
Removal
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2. Loosen the captive screws located on the rear of the cover.
3. Slide the rear access cover toward the rear of the chassis.
4. Lift the cover up and off of the chassis.
Captive screws
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-18
Installation
IMPORTANT: Before installing the rear access cover, check that you have not left tools
or loose parts inside the system.
1. Position the cover on the chassis so that the cover tabs align with the chassis slots.
2. While lightly pressing down on the cover, slide it toward the front of the chassis.
3. Attach the cover to the chassis with the captive screws located on the rear of the cover.
Captive screws
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-19
PCI Access Cover
To install or remove a non-hot-swap PCI board, remove the PCI access cover inside the server. You do not need to
remove the PCI access cover when you work with hot-swap PCI slot.
Removal
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2. Remove the rear access cover.
3. Loosen the screw securing the PCI access cover.
4. Hold the end of the cover (the end where the screw is loosened), and take out the cover slowly and gently.
Installation
Take the following steps to install the PCI access cover.
1. Orient the PCI access cover with the screw toward the front of the server.
2. Insert the tab on the rear side of the PCI access cover into the chassis slot.
3. Slowly and gently put the cover on the chassis, and secure it with a screw.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-20
PCI Board
The server contains six slots for PCI board, and three slots for PCI-Express board.
Some PCI boards support the hot-plug function by which they may be installed or removed with the power of the server
being on. Your server supports the hot-plug function if the Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 is used as operating
system. The PCI boards supporting the hot-plug function only include the N8104-86 100BASE-TX Adapter, N8104-111
100BASE-TX Adapter and the N8103-103 1000BASE-T Adapter.
IMPORTANT: The PCI board is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to
touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before
handling the PCI board. Do not touch the PCI board terminals or on-board parts by a bare
hand or place the PCI board directly on the desk. For static notes, see the section
"Anti-static Measures".
NOTES:
The tab on the PCI board slot indicates hot-plug or non-hot-plug by its colour. Hot-plug
slots have a green tab (PCI slot #5 through #8), and non-hot-plug slots have a blue tab
(PCI slot #1 through #4).
The PCI-Express boards are x1, x4, x8, and x16. The server can contain x1, x4, and x8
PCI-Express board.
Non-hot-plug PCI board slots
(colour: blue)
Hot-plug PCI board slots
(colour: green)
PCI #1, #2 (32-bit/33MHz, 5V PCI)
PCI #3 (PCI-Express (x4))
PCI #4, #5 (PCI-Express(x8))
PCI #6, #7, #8, #9
(64-bit/100MHz, 3.3V PCI-X)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-21
There are three types of PCI boards: 5V PCI boards, 3.3V PCI boards, and universal PCI boards.
A 5V PCI board must be installed in the 5V PCI slot, and a 3.3V PCI board must be installed in the 3.3V PCI slot. A
universal PCI board can be installed in any PCI slot.
5V PCI board
3.3V PCI board
Universal PCI board
The PCI-Express boards are x1, x4, x8, and x16. The server can contain x1, x4, and x8 PCI-Express boards.
PCI-Express board (x4)
PCI-Express board (x8)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-22
RAID Controller Considerations
Note the following on the configuration of a disk array by using the on-board or optional disk array controller.
To change the disk array configuration or the RAID, the hard disk drives must be initialised. If important data
is saved in the hard disk drives used to constitute a disk array, first back up the data in other hard disk drives
before installing boards and configuring the disk array.
At least two hard disk drives are required to configure a disk array.
Hard disk drives used in the disk array configuration should have the same disk revolution rate and capacity in
packs.
See the table on next page for the slot in which an optional board can be installed.
Up to four disk array controller boards can be installed in the server.
Several RAID (Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive [Independent] Disks) levels can be set for the disk array
configuration in the server. See "Disk Array Configuration" described later for available RAIDs, data transfer
rate, and array configuration.
For an optional disk array controller, refer to the documentation coming with the disk array controller for
details.
The available capacity of the hard disk drives in the disk array configuration is lower than the total capacity of
the hard disk drives configuring the disk array while the disk reliability is improved (for RAID 1, 5, 10, or
50).
Set "Option ROM Scan," a parameter of the slot in which a hard disk is installed, to "Enabled" in "PCI
Configuration" in the Advanced menu of the BIOS SETUP utility. For other slots, set the parameter to
"Disabled". ("Enabled" is factory-set.) If two or more disk array controllers are installed, set only the slot
containing the board to boot-up to "Enabled". Do not set "Option ROM Scan" for embedded SCSI to
"Disabled".
Replacement of I/O board or optional disk array controller board
Back up the disk array configuration information in the disk array controller board to a floppy disk and restore
it to the replaced disk array controller board. Use the configuration utility for backup and restoration. See
"Disk Array Configuration" described later or refer to the manual that comes with the disk array controller for
details. If a disk array controller is replaced, create the configuration information newly by using the proper
utility.
When more than one disk array controller board are installed in the server, install the disk array controller
board to which the system disk is connected in the PCI slot having the highest boot priority.
Boot priority: PCI#3 → PCI#4 → PCI#5 → PCI#8 → PCI#9 → PCI#6 → PCI#7 → PCI#1 → PCI#2
For example, if four disk array controller boards are installed in PCI slots #6 to #9, the system disk should be
connected to the board installed in PCI slot #8.
The maximum total capacity of the hard disk drives that are configured as a logical drive or a pack is 2 TB
(terabyte).
The maximum logical disk capacity for installing Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system or Linux
operating system is 1 TB.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-23
List of Optional Devices and their Available Slots
PCI
PCI Express
#4
PCI-X
#7
#1
#2
#3
#5
#6
Bus E
#8
#9
Description
Bus A
Bus B Bus C Bus D
Bus F
32-bit/33MHz
x4
x8
64-bit/100MHz
Product Name
Slot size
Full-height
PCI board type
Available board size
Hot-plug
5V
x8 socket
3.3V
Long/short
Non-hot-plug
Hot-plug
Initio 101
Adaptec 29320
SCSI controller
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
√
–
–
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
(32bit/33MHz PCI) *5
SCSI controller
√
√
–
–
√
√
√
√
(64bit/133MHz PCI-X) *5
SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b SCSI controller
(64bit/133MHz PCI-X) *5
SecuRAID 321
Emulex LP1050
Disk array controller
(64bit/66MHz PCI) *4
Fibre Channel controller
(2Gbps/Optical)
(64bit/133MHz PCI-X) *4
64B PCI-X PRO 1000MT 1000BASE-T Adapter
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
√
√
DUAL
(2ch)(64bit/133MHz PCI-X)
*1
INTEL PRO/1000 TX
64-BIT PCI
INTEL PRO/1000 F
64-BIT PCI
1000BASE-T Adapter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
(64bit/133MHz PCI-X) *1
1000BASE-SX Adapter
(64bit/133MHz PCI-X) *1
√: Can be installed. –: Cannot be installed.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Only one card can be installed per a PCI-X bus.
Up to two cards can be installed.
Up to three cards can be installed.
Up to four cards can be installed.
Up to six cards can be installed.
NOTE: The system BIOS initialises the PCI slots in the order shown below. The order
may be changed according to the types and number of PCI cards.
PCI#3→PCI#4→PCI#5→PCI#8→PCI#9→PCI#6→PCI#7→PCI#1→PCI#2
Onboard LAN Controller Considerations
It is possible to configure the Teaming function of AFT (Adapter Fault Tolerance)/ALB (Adaptive Load Balancing) in a
standard network controller (on board LAN controller).
But it is also impossible to configure the Teaming function of the same AFT/ALB on a standard network controller and
an optional LAN board.
Restriction on Teaming among Onboard LANs
When teaming is configured among onboard LANs, the following system event log appears when Windows starts. You
can ignore this message and continue operation.
source: iANSMiniport
event IDs: 11/13/16/22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-24
Non-hot-plug PCI Boards
This section describes the procedure for installing or removing a non-hot-plug PCI board.
Installation
Install a board in a PCI board slot as follows.
IMPORTANT:
PCI board slots #6 to #9 can accept 3.3V and universal PCI boards.
PCI board slots #1 and #2 can accept 5V and universal PCI boards.
NOTES:
Before installing the PCI board, make sure that the terminal section of the board mates
with the connector of the PCI board slot.
Insulators are installed between the PCI board slots. They are for protecting the PCI
board already been installed. Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when
installing or removing a PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator in
place.
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the system and devices, always turn off the system
before installing a non-hot swap board.
2. Remove the rear access cover.
3. Locate the slot to install a board.
4. Press the retention tab at the tip of the additional slot cover to unlock and open the tab.
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more. Doing so could
damage the tab.
1
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-25
5. Remove the blank plate.
IMPORTANT: Keep the blank plate being removed for future use.
6. Align the board with the grooves of the guide rail, and insert the board slowly and gently.
7. Carefully push the board until it engages and fully seats in the slot connector.
IMPORTANT: If the board cannot be installed easily, remove the board once and then
reinstall it. Excess force added to the board may cause the board to be broken.
NOTES:
After installed a long board, secure it with the lock on the upper part of the guide rail.
Insulators are installed between the PCI board slots. They are for protecting the PCI
board already installed. Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when installing
or removing a PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-26
8. Slowly close the tab to secure the PCI board.
NOTE: Make sure that the tab is firmly locked. If the tab is unlocked, the PCI board
and/or I/O board may be damaged due to unstable PCI board.
9. Reinstall the removed components.
10. Turn on the power of the server. Then make sure that any error message does not appear in POST.
If an error message appears, write down the message and review the error message list in Chapter 8.
11. Start the BIOS Setup Utility to set the "Reset Configuration Data" in the "Advanced" menu to "Yes."
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for details.
Removal
Remove the board in the reverse procedure of the installation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-27
Hot-plug PCI Board
On the PCI board slots #5 through #9, you can replace or add a hot-plug PCI board while the server is operating.
Only N8104-86 100BASE-TX Adapter, N8104-111 100BASE-TX Adapter and N8104-103 1000BASE-T Adapter
support the Hot-plug PCI function.
The PCI hot-plug function includes the following functions:
Hot Add
Use Hot Add to install a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating.
Hot Remove
Use Hot Remove to remove a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating.
Hot Replace
Use Hot Replace to replace a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating.
IMPORTANT:
Before removing a PCI board, be sure to stop the driver of the slot (containing the PCI board)
from the operating system (Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000). Failure to do so may cause
the system to fail.
For Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000 server, do not use a function in inactive state after
executing the PCI Hot-plug function. The system fails to return to the original state when a
function in inactive state is restarted.
Use the BIOS Setup utility to set the following before executing the PCI Hot Plug function:
Select [Advanced] → [PCI Configuration] → [Hot-plug PCI Control] → [Reserving memory
space for PHP] → Select memory space for installed board*1.
*1 The memory capacity appears to be less than the actually installed memory capacity.
To execute the PCI Hot-plug function, be sure to log in the system as Administrator.
The board available for the hot add varies depending on the clock rate previously set by PCI
slots #6 and #7 or #8 and #9. If a PCI board operating at a different clock rate is subject to the
hot addition, the PCI slot fault lamp goes on and the hot plug cannot be performed correctly.
However, restarting the system allows BIOS to ignore the setting value and automatically
operate the system with the optimum setting.
Requirements for Hot Add
No boards installed in the same bus
Verify the available slot according to "List of Optional Devices and their Available Slots", and then hot-add
the PCI card.
PCI boards installed on the same bus
Provide Hot Add for PCI boards operating at the same clock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-28
Status Lamps
Two LEDs on the back panel indicate the status of the hot-plug PCI add-in boards. You can check the indication by
lamps on the I/O board.
PCI slot Power lamp (green)
Lights when power is supplied normally to the PCI board installed.
PCI slot Fault lamp (amber)
Lights when an error occurs on PCI board or the slot containing the PCI board.
Flashes when the driver is stopped from Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000 for Hot Remove or Hot
Replace.
PCI slot Fault lamp
PCI slot Power lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-29
Hot Add
Take the following procedure to execute Hot Add:
1. Remove the rear access cover from the server with the power being on.
2. Locate the slot in which you are going to install an additional board.
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the slot in which you are going to install
the PCI board is off.
3. Push the tab at the tip of the additional slot cover of the slot in which you are going to install the PCI board to
unlock the tab. Open the tab.
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more. Doing so could
damage the tab.
1
2
4. Remove the slot cover.
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed slot cover for future use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-30
5. Push the PCI board slowly and carefully into the slot.
6. Push the PCI board until the connection part of the board is firmly connected into the slot.
IMPORTANT: If failing to install the PCI board correctly, reinstall it. Be careful not to
apply excess force to the PCI board when handling it. Applying excess force may cause
damage to the PCI board.
NOTES:
After installed a long board, secure it with the lock on the upper part of the guide rail.
Insulators are installed between the PCI board slots. They are for protecting the PCI
boards already installed. Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when
installing or removing the PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator
in place.
7. Connect the cables to the PCI board while firmly holding the PCI board with your hand.
8. Slowly close the tab to secure the PCI board.
9. Press the PCI Hot Plug switch. The PCI Slot Power lamp flashes once and then, goes on.
NOTES:
If the server runs on Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000, the operating system
automatically recognises the additionally installed PCI board and installs the driver.
If an error occurred in the installed board or slot, the PCI Slot Fault lamp goes on
(amber).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-31
10. Reinstall the rear access cover.
11. Check if the additionally installed PCI board is recognised and working properly as follows:
(1) Select [Control Panel], [Administrative Tools], [Computer Management], and [Device Manager] in the
order to start the Device Manager.
(2) Move the cursor to the added board.
(3) Click the [General] tab to display the property to confirm that the device is working properly.
* The message in the "property" depends on the location of the PCI board slot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-32
Hot Remove
Use the following procedure to execute Hot Remove:
1. Stop the device driver used by the Hot-plug PCI board you want to remove as follows:
IMPORTANT: Before removing a PCI board, be sure to stop the driver of the slot
(containing the PCI board) from the operating system. Failure to do so may cause the
system to fail.
To stop the device driver from the operating system window:
(1) Open [Add/Remove Hardware] in [Control Panel].
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] starts.
(2) Click [Next].
(3) Select [Uninstall/Unplug a device] for hardware task, then click [Next].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-33
(4) Select [Unplug/Eject a device] for removal task, then click [Next].
(5) Select the target device, then click [Next].
(6) Confirm that the driver is used by the device you want to remove, then click [Next].
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] closes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-34
(7) Click [Finish].
(9) Remove the rear access cover and locate the slot from which the board has to be removed.
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the target PCI slot is off.
To stop the device driver using the PCI hot-plug switch:
(1) Remove the rear access cover and confirm the slot to remove the PCI board.
(2) Press the PCI hot-plug switch on the slot from which the PCI board is to be removed.
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the target PCI slot is off.
2. Disconnect all the cables from the PCI board.
3. Push the tab to unlock it, slowly open the tab, then remove the PCI board.
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more. Doing so could
damage the tab.
Lock (for long card)
Tab
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-35
4. Install a slot cover on the slot from which you removed the PCI board, then slowly close the tab.
IMPORTANT: To maintain the dust-proofing and electromagnetic radiation
characteristics and cooling performance of the server, be sure to install the blank plate on
the slot from which you removed the PCI board.
5. Reinstall the rear access cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-36
Hot Replace
Use the following procedure to execute a Hot Replace:
1. Stop the device driver used by the Hot Plug PCI board you want to replace as follows:
IMPORTANT: Before removing a PCI board, be sure to stop the driver of the slot
(containing the PCI board) from the operating system. Failure to do so may cause the
system to fail.
To stop the device driver from the operating system window:
(1) Open [Add/Remove Hardware] in [Control Panel].
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] starts.
(2) Click [Next].
(3) Select [Uninstall/Unplug a device] for hardware task, then click [Next].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-37
(4) Select [Unplug/Eject a device] for removal task, then click [Next].
(5) Select the target device, then click [Next].
(6) Confirm that the driver is used by the device you want to remove, then click [Next].
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] terminates.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-38
(7) Click [Finish].
(8) Remove the rear access cover and locate the board to be removed.
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the target PCI slot is off.
2. Disconnect all the cables from the PCI board.
3. Push the tab to unlock it, slowly open the tab, then remove the PCI board.
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more. Doing so could
damage the tab.
Lock (for long card)
Tab
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-39
4. Slowly insert the PCI board into the server.
5. Push the PCI board until the connection part of the board is firmly connected into the slot.
IMPORTANT: If failing to install the PCI board correctly, reinstall it. Be careful not to
apply excess force to the PCI board when handling it. Applying excess force may cause
damage to the PCI board.
NOTES:
After installed a long board, secure it with the lock on the upper part of the guide rail.
Insulators are installed between the PCI board slots.
They are for protecting the PCI boards already installed. Take care not to remove or
damage the insulator when installing or removing the PCI board. If the insulator is taken
off, reinstall the insulator in place.
6. Connect the cables to the PCI board while firmly holding the PCI board with your hand.
7. Slowly close the tab to secure the PCI board.
8. Press the PCI hot plug switch.
The PCI Slot Power lamp flashes once, and then goes on.
NOTES:
If the server runs on Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000, the operating system
automatically recognises the installed PCI board and installs the driver.
If an error occurred in the installed board or slot, the PCI Slot Fault lamp goes on
(amber).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-40
9. Reinstall the PCI slot cover.
10. Check if the installed PCI board is recognised and working properly as follows:
(1) Select [Control Panel], [Administrative Tools], [Computer Management], and [Device Manager] in the
order to start the Device Manager.
(2) Move the cursor to the added board.
(3) Display the [General] dialog in the property to confirm that the device is working properly.
* The message in the "property" depends on the location of the PCI board slot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-41
Notes when removing the PCI slot insulators
Be careful that the insulator does not make contact with the capacitor of the PCI-Express slot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-42
Memory Board
To install or remove a DIMM, remove the memory board first.
One memory board is factory-installed in the server. Up to four memory boards (32 GB maximum) can be installed in
the server.
The failing DIMM or memory board can be hot-swapped (replacement with power-on state) in the memory RAID
configuration. For hot-swap memory board, see "Memory Hot-Plug Feature 1 (Hot Replace)" and "Memory Hot-Plug
Feature 2 (Hot Add)" described later in this chapter.
Memory board slot #3
(for additional memory
board)
Memory board slot #4
(for additional memory
board)
Memory board slot #2
(for additional memory
board)
Memory board slot #1
(for factory-installed
memory board)
Memory board installation order: #2 → #3 → #4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-43
Removal
Remove the memory board as follows:
IMPORTANT:
The memory board is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the
metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling
the memory board. Do not touch the memory board terminals or on-board parts by a
bare hand or place the memory board directly on the desk. For static notes, see the
section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.
The memory board becomes very hot while being powered. When removing the board,
turn off the power and wait for several minutes before pulling it out.
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3. Remove the two screws, and remove the memory slot cover from the front of the server.
4. Unlock the memory board to open the ejector.
The memory board becomes very hot while being powered. When removing the board, turn off the power and
wait for several minutes before pulling it out.
Note that the hot-plug memory board is off-powered when it is unlocked (the LED goes off). Wait several
minutes in this state.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-44
5. Hold the ejector and pull the memory board out from the server.
6. Put the memory board on a dry, clean, and static-free place.
Installation
Install the memory board in reverse order of the removal steps.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-45
DIMM
Install an additional DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) in a DIMM socket on the memory board in the server.
DIMMs are installed on the sockets in the ascending order of DIMM socket numbers in the unit of two modules.
NOTE: Up to 8 GB of memory (2 GB DIMM × 4) can be installed.
DIMM slot 4
DIMM slot 3
DIMM slot 2
DIMM slot 1
*
DIMM specification is shown on the label attached to the DIMM as follows:
Example: Frequency of 400 MHz, buffered, capacity of 1GB, row
address of 14 bits, column address of 11 bits, and
single rank
2-400 / B / 1024 / R14 C11
S
Single rank
Column address
Row address
Capacity
Buffered / Registered
Frequency
IMPORTANT: The last digit character indicates the symbol representing either of single
rank (S) or dual rank (D).
If DIMMs of single rank and dual rank are installed on the same memory board, be sure to
install the DIMM of dual rank in DIMM Group #1 (DIMM slots 1 and 2). Otherwise, the
system will fail to start.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-46
Installation
Install a DIMM as follows:
IMPORTANT:
The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal
frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the
DIMM. Do not touch the DIMM terminals or on-board parts by a bare hand or place the
DIMM directly on the desk. For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures"
described earlier.
*
Make sure to use a DIMM authorised by us. Installing a third-party DIMM may cause a
failure of the DIMM as well as the server. Repair of the server due to failures or damage
resulting from installing such a board will be charged.
Install two additional DIMMs for each group because the server uses interleaved
memory. If DIMMs of different specifications* are installed in a group, the server does
not operate normally.
DIMM specification is shown on the label attached to the DIMM as follows:
Example: Frequency of 400 MHz, buffered, capacity of 1GB, row
address of 14 bits, column address of 11 bits, and
single rank
2-400 / B / 1024 / R14 C11
S
Single rank
Column address
Row address
Capacity
Buffered / Registered
Frequency
A dummy tray is installed in the additional memory board slot. If you remove the
dummy tray, keep it for future use.
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3. Remove the memory slot cover, and remove the memory board on which the DIMMs are to be installed.
See "Memory Board" described earlier in this chapter.
NOTE: To additionally install a memory board, remove one screw to remove the blank
cover from the additional slot.
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed blank cover for future use.
4. Locate the DIMM sockets in which you are going to install DIMMs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-47
5. Fully open the levers at both ends of the socket (1) and remove the socket cover.
IMPORTANT:
To avoid damaging the lever, do not apply an excess force to the lever.
Keep the removed blank cover for future use.
6. Push the DIMM straight into the socket (2).
NOTE: Make sure of the orientation of DIMM. The terminal side of the DIMM has a
cut-out to prevent incorrect insertion.
The levers automatically close when the DIMM is inserted into the socket (3).
IMPORTANT: Always install the DIMMs in pair. Two DIMMs must be of the same
specification. DIMM specification is shown on the label attached to the DIMM as follows:
Example: Frequency of 400 MHz, buffered, capacity of 1GB, row
address of 14 bits, column address of 11 bits, and
single rank
2-400 / B / 1024 / R14 C11
S
Single rank
Column address
Row address
Capacity
Buffered / Registered
Frequency
7. Install the memory board back into the chassis slot.
8. Install the memory slot cover.
9. Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages.
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error messages listed in
Chapter 8.
10. Start the SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] to verify that the installed DIMM shows
the status "Normal". (See Chapter 4 for details.)
11. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the [Advanced] menu.
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See Chapter 4 for details.
12. If Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 is in use, set the paging file size to the recommended value (total
memory size * 1.5) or a greater value. See Chapter 5 for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-48
Removal
Remove a DIMM as follows:
IMPORTANT: The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch
the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling
the DIMM. Do not touch the DIMM terminals or on-board parts by a bare hand or place the
DIMM directly on the desk. For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures"
described earlier.
NOTE: To remove the failed DIMM, check the error message appearing in POST or
ESMPRO to identify the DIMM socket (group) in which the failed DIMM is installed.
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3. Remove the memory slot cover, and then remove the memory board on which the DIMMs to be removed are
installed.
NOTE: The error lamp corresponding to the failing DIMM goes on.
4. Open the levers at both sides of the socket from which you remove the DIMM.(1).
The DIMM is unlocked and ready for removal.(2)
5. Install the memory board.
6. Install the memory slot cover.
7. Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages.
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error messages listed in
Chapter 8.
8. Start the SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory Retest] → [Enabled] to
clear the error information of the removed DIMM. Then, Then, select [Server] → [Clear FRU LED] → [Yes]
to turn off the LED indicating DIMM error. (See Chapter 4 for details.)
9. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu.
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See Chapter 4 for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-49
Memory Mirroring / Memory RAID Feature
Memory Mirroring Feature
The memory mirroring feature places a memory board as spare memory in standby state. If the current memory board
encounters an uncorrectable error, the memory mirroring feature switches to the standby memory board. When this
feature is used, the current memory board and the standby memory board should be combined. Available combinations
are:
Mirroring with memory boards 1 and 2
Mirroring with a pair of memory boards 1 and 2 and a pair of memory boards 3 and 4
To enable the memory mirroring feature, the combined memory boards must have DIMMs of same capacities.
The table below shows combinations of memory boards installed.
Memory board 1
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
4GB (1GB*4)
Memory board 2
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
4GB (1GB*4)
Memory board 3
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
–
Memory board 4
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
–
A
B
C
Memory RAID Feature
If one of the four memory boards encounters an uncorrectable error, the memory RAID feature switches to the other
memory board to continue operation. To use this feature, four memory boards must be installed. Each memory board
must have DIMMs of same capacities.
The table below shows combinations of memory boards installed.
Memory board 1
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
4GB (1GB*4)
Memory board 2
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
4GB (1GB*4)
Memory board 3
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
4GB (1GB*4)
Memory board 4
2GB (1GB*2)
8GB (2GB*4)
4GB (1GB*4)
A
B
C
Setting BIOS
Start SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory RAS Feature] and set as follows:
To enable the memory mirroring feature: Select [Mirror].
To enable the memory RAID feature: Select [RAID].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-50
Others
Memory capacity displayed on the operating system = total capacity of physically installed memory –
capacity for standby memory
Memory mirroring feature: 1/2 of actually installed memory capacity
Memory RAID feature: 3/4 of actually installed memory capacity
Enabling the memory mirroring or memory RAID feature does not influence the operations of applications.
Each feature is automatically disabled when an error message is displayed:
The following indicates that the memory mirroring /memory RAID feature has worked:
a) The Redundancy lamp on the front panel of the server lights green.
b) The failing DIMM group is degraded when the server restarts.
c) If ESMPRO Agent has been installed, the following log is registered as a system log of Event Viewer:
Source name:
Event ID:
ESMCommonService
2313
Explanation:
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.
Memory number: XX
Date/time: XX
d) If report setting is made through ESMPRO Agent, Manager reporting and ALIVE reporting is performed.
The report contents are as follows:
Explanation:
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.
Memory number: XX
Date/time:
XX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-51
Memory Hot-Plug Feature 1 (Hot Replace)
In the memory redundant configuration such as memory mirroring and memory RAID configuration, the memory board
can be removed while the operating system is running.
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3. Remove the two screws and then remove the memory slot cover.
4. Press the Attention switch corresponding to the memory board to be removed.
The memory board power lamp and the memory board redundancy lamp for that board go off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-52
5. Make sure that the memory board power lamp goes off, then remove the memory board.
IMPORTANT: The memory board becomes very hot while being powered. When
removing the board, turn off the power and wait for several minutes before pulling it out.
Note that the hot-plug memory board is off-powered when it is unlocked (the LED goes
off). Wait several minutes in this state.
6. Hold the ejector and pull the memory board out from the server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-53
7. To set back the memory boards in redundant configuration, install the memory boards in reverse order of
removal procedure. Then, press the Attention switch on the memory board. The memory board Power lamp
starts flashing, and after a while, it goes on. The Memory Board Redundancy lamp goes on.
This completes Hot Replace of memory board.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-54
Memory Hot-Plug Feature 2 (Hot Add)
In Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition, you can use the Hot-Add memory feature. The Hot Add feature allows you
to add a physical memory without shutting down the system.
To use the Hot-Add memory feature, set the BIOS as follows:
Setting BIOS
Start SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory RAS Feature] in order and set as follows:
To enable the Hot-Add memory feature in normal mode: Select [Normal].
To enable the Hot-Add memory feature in mirroring mode: Select [Mirror].
NOTE: Before selecting [Mirror], the mirroring configuration must have been set for
memory boards 1 and 2. In this case, the memory hot plug is used for memory boards 3 and
4. (Memory boards 3 and 4 must also be in mirroring configuration.)
In addition, be sure to specify [Advanced] → [ Memory Configuration] → [Hot-add
Memory Support] to "Enabled".
Hot-Add memory feature in normal mode
When the operating system starts with memory board 1 (factory-installed), installing memory boards on
which DIMMs are installed to memory board slots 2, 3, and 4 can increase the physical memory capacity. See
Memory Hot-Plug Feature 1 for memory board installing procedure.
For example, if you insert a memory board into memory board slot 2 and press the Attention switch of that
slot, the memory board Power lamp starts flashing and initialisation of memory is started.
When the memory board Power lamp stops flashing and goes on, the operating system is notified that the
memory has been added.
The notification is processed on the operating system. After a while, you can view the added physical memory
in performance monitor of task manager. Memory boards can be added to slots 3 and 4 in a similar procedure.
Hot-Add memory feature in mirroring mode
Add the memory boards 3 and 4 while the memory boards 1 and 2 are configured to use the mirroring feature.
In this case, memory boards 3 and 4 must be configured to use the mirroring feature. See Memory Hot-Plug
Feature 1 for memory board installing procedure.
the only difference with normal mode is that the memory board is added to slot 3, and there is no change in
system status. Adding a memory board to memory board slot 4 can make the memory mirroring configuration.
And it is notified to the operating system. After a while, you can view the added physical memory in
performance monitor of task manager.
You can confirm that a half of installed physical memory capacity is added. In memory mirroring
configuration, the memory board additionally installed by using the Hot-Add memory feature can be
hot-replaceable.
Indication on ESMPRO Data Viewer after Hot-Add Memory
If you add a memory board dynamically by using Hot-Add feature, the added memory size will not be
indicated on Data Viewer of ESMPRO Manager unless the system is rebooted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-55
Processor Board
To install or remove a processor, remove the processor board.
Removal
Remove the processor board as follows:
IMPORTANT: The processor board is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure
to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before
handling the processor board. Do not touch the processor board terminals or on-board parts
by a bare hand or place the processor board directly on the desk. For static notes, see the
section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3. Remove the memory board cover.
4. Remove the two screws and then remove the processor board cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-56
5. Remove the two screws securing the ejectors.
6. Unlock the processor board and open the ejectors.
7. Firmly hold the processor board and pull it out from the chassis.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-57
NOTE: Notes when removing the processor board
The processor board is very heavy (max. 7 kg). Pay attention not to drop it.
8. Put the processor board on a dry, clean, and static-free place.
Installation
Install the processor board in reverse order of the removal steps.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-58
Processor
The processor board is equipped with sockets to install four 64-bit Intel® Xeon™ processors MP and corresponding
VRMs. (One processor and one VRM are factory-installed.)
Processor VRM #1
Processor VRM #3
Processor VRM #2
Processor VRM #4
Processor #3
Processor #1
Processor #4
Processor #2
NOTE: If different revisions of processors are installed in a multiprocessor system,
Windows 2000 logs the following information every start-up. If this message is logged, it is
no problem for operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-59
Installation
Install a processor as follows:
IMPORTANT:
The processor is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal
frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the
processor. Do not touch the processor pins by a bare hand or place the processor directly
on the desk. For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.
When using the server in the single processor configuration, processor must be installed
on Processor #1 socket.
Install the processor in the ascending order of the processor number (see figure above).
To maintain the cooling effect in the server, install a dummy cover to the empty slot.
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2. Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3. Remove the memory slot cover.
4. Remove the processor slot cover.
5. Remove the processor board.
6. Locate the processor socket in which you are going to install the processor, remove four screws, then remove
the dummy cover from the socket.
7. Remove the protective cover from the socket surface.
8. Raise the locking lever on the socket.
IMPORTANT: Open the lever until it stops. It can be opened to approximately 120
degrees.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-60
9. Put the processor on the socket slowly and gently.
NOTE: Make sure of the orientation of the processor. Pin layouts on two corners among
four differ from others to prevent an incorrect insertion. Confirm the pin mark and pin
layout on the socket, and insert the processor correctly.
Pin mark
10. Push the processor lightly to the socket, and push down the lever to secure the processor.
11. Remove the cooling sheet from the bottom of the heat sink, and put the heat sink on processor.
NOTE: You do not need to care of the direction of heat sink.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-61
12. Tighten the four screws to secure the heat sink.
13. Make sure that the heat sink is level.
IMPORTANT: If the heat sink is not level, remove it, and check if the processor is
positioned correctly.
14. Fully open the levers on both sides of the VRM socket.
15. Push the VRM straight into the socket.
When the VRM is inserted into the socket, the lever automatically closes. Push the lever toward inside to
securely close the lever.
NOTE: Make sure of the orientation of the VRM. The terminal side of VRM has a cut-out
to prevent the incorrect insertion.
16. Install the components you removed previously.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-62
17. Start SETUP and select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu.
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See Chapter 4 for details.
18. To add one or more processors to the server in 1-processor configuration to operate the server with more than
one processor, do the procedure below:
For Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000, change the driver of [Computer] in the device manager to
[ACPI multi-processor PC] and then update the system (see Chapter 5).
Removal
To remove the processor, prepare the removal referring to steps 1 to 5 of the installation procedure and do the reverse
procedure of steps 8 to 12.
IMPORTANT:
Do not remove any processor unless it is failed.
To maintain the cooling effect in the server, a dummy cover is installed in the empty slot.
Be sure to install a dummy cover on the slot where the processor is not installed.
After the operation, heat may make the cool seat at the bottom of the heat sink adhere to
the processor. To remove the heat sink from the processor, first turn the heat sink to the
left and right lightly to make sure that the heat sink can be set apart from the processor.
Removing the heat sink with it adhering to the processor may cause the processor
and/or socket to be damaged.
Do as follows if a processor is removed (or replaced):
1. Start SETUP, select menus "Main" – "Processor Settings" – "Processor Retest" in order to clear the error
information on the removed processor (see Chapter 4).
When a processor is replaced, select menus "Main" – "Processor Settings" to confirm that the ID and L2 and
L3 Cache of the additional processor are defined correctly (see Chapter 4).
2. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu.
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Specifications
Item
Express5800/140He
Model type at shipment
Type
Diskless
64-bit Intel® Xeon™ Processor MP
3.16 GHz/1 MB
3.66 GHz/1 MB
3.33 GHz/8 MB (on
specific configurations
only)
Clock/2nd cache
Processor
Number of processors
Maximum
1
4
Chipset
Intel TwinCastle + ICH5 + Dobson + PXH
2 GB (1 GB×2)
Standard
Maximum
32 GB (The standard DIMMs must be replaced.)
2 DIMMs
Expansion unit
Expansion times
Maximum 8 times (2 times per each memory board)
DDR2 400 SDRAM DIMM (Registered)
ECC
Memory
Memory module
Error check
Memory mirroring feature
Online sparing memory feature
Memory Hot-add/Hot-replace feature
Memory RAID feature
Supported
Graphics (VRAM)
ATI® Radeon® 7000M (VRAM 16MB)
Floppy disk (standard)
–
–
Auxiliary
input
device
Hard disk (standard)
Hard disk (maximum)
CD-ROM (standard)
1500 GB (300 GB × 5) + 2400 GB (300 GB x 8, Additional HDD cage
is required)
ATAPI Interface × 1 (Load on tray type, x24 speed)
2 slots (Full height x1)
5.25-inch device bay
3.5-inch disk bay
Up to 13 slots (Hot-swappable, Additional HDD cage is required)
4 slots (Hot-swappable)
PCI-X 100MHz (64-bit)
Additional
slot
PCI 33MHz (32-bit)
PCI EXPRESS(x8)
PCI EXPRESS(x4)
2 slots
2 slots (Hot-swappable)
1 slot
LAN interface
1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (2 port)
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (1 port, dedicated for server management)
LAN interface (A-RMC)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-2
Item
Express5800/140He
MINI DIN 6-pin connector (1 port)
Keyboard
Mouse
USB
MINI DIN 6-pin connector (1 port)
4-pin (3 ports; front: 1 (USB1.1), rear: 2 (USB2.0))
External
interface
D-sub 9-pin (2 ports, rear), RJ-45 (1 port, front (exclusively used with
either port on the rear panel))
Serial
Parallel
Network
Display
SCSI
D-sub 25-pin (1 port)
RJ-45 (2 ports and 1 management port)
MINI D-sub 15-pin (1 port)
–
Cabinet design
External dimensions
Weight
Middle-Tower
310 (width) × 456 (height) × 805 (depth) mm
75 kg (Max.)
Power supply
100 to 127 Vac ±10%, 200 to 240 Vac ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±1Hz
Power consumption
1800 VA
Temperature
Humidity
10 to 35°C
Environmental
requirements
20 to 80% RH (no condensation)
Others
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER supported, NEC ESMPRO provided in the
standard configuration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Other Precautions
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller
The LAN controller on the IO board has two ports. Each port supports 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T
networks and a capable of full or half duplex.
The controller can automatically detect and switch for network speed and transfer mode connected to the HUB.
However, for proper network operation, specify the "Link Speed & Duplex" value the same as the value specified for
the HUB.
Server Management Software
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with the server contains the NEC ESMPRO utility.
We recommend that you should install NEC ESMPRO for effective use of the reliability enhancement features of the
server.
Floppy Disk
The following describes use of the floppy disk.
Floppy disk type
The server uses 3.5-inch floppy disks. You can use the following two types of 3.5-inch floppy disks:
2HD floppy disk (double-sided high-density track type)
Stores data of 1.44 MB.
2DD floppy disk (double-sided double-density track type)
Stores data of 720 KB.
Shutter
Catching hole
Insertion direction
indicator
Head window
Centering hub
Label
Centering hole
High-density media hole
(2HD only)
Write protection
hole
Write protection switch
Front
Rear
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-2
Notes on use
The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care. Keep the following notes in
mind to use it:
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes.
Attach the label to the correct position.
Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball-point pen.
Do not open the shutter.
Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.
Do not place anything on the floppy disk.
Do not leave the floppy disk in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a
heater).
Do not leave the floppy disk with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette smoke.
Do not leave the floppy disk near any form of liquid or a chemical or in a place where a chemical may be
accidentally sprayed over them.
Do not place any magnetic objects (e.g., magnet) near the floppy disk.
Do not clip the floppy disk or drop it.
Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust.
Write-protection
A floppy disk has a write-protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental erasure.
You can read data from a write-protected floppy disk, but you cannot save data into the floppy disk or format
it. We recommend that you should write-protect any floppy disk containing valuable data unless you are about
to save data.
To write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, use the write-protect switch provided on its back.
Disk format
To write data into a floppy disk, the floppy disk must be "formatted." "Formatting" is to initialise the floppy
disk and make it available for the system environment (operating system).
IMPORTANT:
Formatting a used floppy disk clears all the data contained in it, if any.
Formatting a floppy disk from the DOS command line is not available with the server.
Use a formatted floppy disk to work with it on the DOS command line.
The format method depends on your operating system. Refer to the manual that comes with your operating
system for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-3
Data backup
"Data backup" is to copy data stored in a media into another media (e.g., floppy disk, digital audio tape, or
magnet-optical disk).
IMPORTANT: Make sure to make a back-up copy of every floppy disk, if provided.
The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media. Dust or thermal changes, as well as operator's misconduct or
sever failures, may cause loss of data. To avoid loss of data, we recommend that you should make a back-up
copy of your valuable data on a regular basis.
CD-ROM
Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD-ROM for the server:
Press the centre of the storage case to remove the CD-ROM from the case.
Do not drop the CD-ROM.
Do not place anything on the CD-ROM or bend the CD-ROM.
Do not attach any label onto the CD-ROM.
Do not touch the signal side (nothing is printed on this side) with your hand.
Place the CD-ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray.
Do not scratch the CD-ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball-point pen.
Do not leave the CD-ROM with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette smoke.
Do not leave the CD-ROM in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a
heater).
When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD-ROM, wipe the CD-ROM from its centre to edge with a dry
soft cloth slowly and gently.
Use CD cleaner to clean the CD-ROM. Do not use record spray/cleaner, benzene, or thinner.
Keep the CD-ROM in a CD-ROM case when not in use.
Tape Media
The following describes data handling with the DAT, DLT, or AIT optionally available for the server.
Saving your valuable data
When you save your valuable data or programs into the cartridge tape, you should save them into two
cartridge tapes to make the primary and secondary tapes.
This enables you to restore your data from one tape when the other makes a read error, as well as to protect
your valuable data and programs from loss.
Three-generation data management
We recommend that you should employ three-generation data management for data storage.
Three-generation data management uses three cartridge tapes: A, B, and C. You save data to tape A on the first
day, tape B on the second day, tape C on the third day, tape A on the forth day, and so on. That is, you save
data into cartridge tapes cyclically from tape A through C.
This enables you, for example, to use tape B to restore the data when tape C makes a read error. Also when
both tapes B and C make a read error, you can restore your valuable data by using the data stored in tape A.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-4
Keyboard
The keyboard is a device to instruct you computer by entering alphanumeric characters or symbols.
IMPORTANT:
Do not pour any liquid such as water or put anything into the keyboard. Doing so may
cause a failure of the keyboard.
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of an angle. Adjust
the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate. The adjustment assists in
reducing strain on your shoulders, arms, and fingers.
NOTE: The keyboard functions depend on the software. Refer to the manual that comes
with the software for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-5
Mouse
Like the keyboard, the mouse is a device to instruct your computer. Many operating systems and application software
require the mouse for operation.
NOTE:
Functions assigned to the mouse buttons vary depending on the software. For details,
refer to the manual provided with the software.
Use the mouse on a clean desk. Using the mouse on a dusty or dirty desk disturbs
smooth movement or normal operation of the mouse. When your mouse movement
seems dull, clean your mouse. (See Chapter 7.)
Mouse operation includes "Click," "Double-click," and "Drag."
Click:
Press the button only once and release it.
Double-click:
Drag:
Press the button twice consecutively and release it.
Press and hold the button and move the mouse.
Operation of the server involves combinations of these mouse operations and data entries with the keyboard.
Click
Pressing
Click
Click
Click
Double-click
Drag
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-6
This page is intentionally left blank
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
IRQ and I/O Port Address
The factory-set interrupt requests and I/O port addresses are listed below. Find an appropriate one to install an optional
device.
Interrupt Request
The factory-set IRQs are assigned as follows:
IRQ
0
Peripheral Device (Controller)
System timer
IRQ
8
Peripheral Device (Controller)
Real-time clock
1
Keyboard
9
PCI/SCI
2
3
4
5
6
7
Cascaded connection
COM B serial port (PCI)
COM A serial port (PCI)
PCI/LPT2 parallel port
Floppy disk
10
11
12
13
14
15
PCI
BMCIRQ/PCI
Mouse
Numeric processor
Primary IDE (CD-ROM drive)
PCI
LPT1 parallel port
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-2
PIRQ and PCI Device
The factory-set PCI device interrupts are assigned as follows. You can change these interrupts by using the BIOS
SETUP, however, use the factory-set interrupts as they are. See Chapter 4 for details.
PIRQ1
PIRQ2
PIRQ3
PIRQ4
PIRQ5
PIRQ8
USB#1
√
USB#2
√
USB20
√
IDE (native mode)
SMBus
√
√
VGA
INTA
RAID
LAN
INTA
INTA
INTB
INTB
PCISlot#1 (PCI)
INTC
INTD
INTC
INTD
INTB
INTA
PCISlot#2 (PCI)
INTA
PCI Slot#3(PCI-EXPRESS)
PCI Slot#4 (PCI-EXPRESS)
PCI Slot#5 (PCI-EXPRESS)
PCI Slot#6 (PCI-X)
INTA
INTA
INTA
INTB
INTD
INTB
INTB
INTB
INTC
INTC
INTC
INTA
INTC
INTD
INTD
INTD
PCI Slot#7 (PCI-X)
PCI Slot#8 (PCI-X)
PCI Slot#9 (PCI-X)
INTB
INTD
INTA
INTC
INTA
INTC
INTB
INTD
INTA
INTC
INTB
INTD
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-3
I/O Port Address
The factory-set I/O port addresses for the server are assigned as follows:
Addresses
00-08h
09-0Eh
0Fh
Description
DMA Control Registers
RESERVED
DMA Control Register
Chip
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
10-18h
19-1Eh
1Fh
DMA Control Register
RESERVED
DMA Control Register
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
20-21h
24-25h
28-29h
2C-2Dh
2E-2Fh
30-31h
34-35h
38-39h
3C-3Dh
40-42h
43h
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Configuration Registers
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Master 8259 Programming Interface
8254 Programming Interface
RESERVED
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
PC87417
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
4E-4Fh
50-52h
53h
Configuration Registers
8254 Programming Interface
RESERVED
PC87417
ICH5
ICH5
60h
61h
Keyboard/Mouse
NMI Status Register
PC87417
ICH5
62h
63h
64h
65h
PC87417
ICH5
PC87417
ICH5
NMI Status Register
Keyboard/Mouse
NMI Status Register
66h
67h
PC87417
ICH5
NMI Status Register
70h
RESERVED
ICH5
71h
RTC (data)
ICH5
72h
RTC (data)
ICH5
73h
RTC (data)
ICH5
74h
RTC (data)
ICH5
75h
RTC (data)
ICH5
76h
RTC (data)
ICH5
77h
RTC (data)
ICH5
80-91h
92h
16-bit DMA Control Registers
Port 92 Register
ICH5
ICH5
93-9Fh
A0-A1h
A4-A5h
A8-A9h
AC-ADh
B0-B1h
B2-B3h
B4-B5h
B8-B9h
BC-BDh
C0-D1h
C2-DDh
DE-DFh
F0h
DMA Control Register
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Power Management
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
DMA Controller Page Registers
RESERVED
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
DMA Controller Page Registers
Reset IRQ13
102h
170h-177h
VGA
Radeon7000M
ICH5
Secondary IDE Command Block Registers
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-4
Addresses
1F0h-1F7h
278-27Fh
2F8-2FFh
376h
370-377h
378-37Fh
3B0-3BBh
3BC-3BEh
3C0-3CFh
3D4-3D5h
3F6h
3F0-3F7h
3F8-3FFh
40Bh
4D0h
4D1h
Description
Primary IDE Command Block Registers
(Parallel Port 3)
Chip
ICH5
PC87417
PC87417
ICH5
PC87417
PC87417
Radeon7000M
PC87417
Radeon7000M
Radeon7000M
ICH5
PC87417
PC87417
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
Serial port 2
Secondary IDE Control Block Registers
(Floppy disk 2), IDE 2
(Parallel Port 2)
VGA
Parallel port 1
VGA
VGA
Primary IDE Control Block registers
Floppy disk 1,IDE 1
Serial port 1
DMA1 Extended Write Mode Register
Master 8259 ELCR Programming
Slave 8259 ELCR Programming
Turbo and Reset Control
CF9h
TwinCastle
*1 Hexadecimal notation
*2 The I/O port address of a PCI device is set according to its type and number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions
This section describes the procedures for installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition without using Express Setup tool.
BEFORE INSTALLING Windows Server 2003 X64 EDITIONS
Please read carefully the following information BEFORE beginning your Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
Installation.
Optional Boards Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards:
NOTE: If you want to install other boards by using a driver floppy disk ("OEM-FD for
Mass storage device") than the ones listed below, see "Exceptional setup" and "Installing
Optional Mass Storage Driver" of "Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6.
Supporting installation of the operating system in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
– On Board RAID (Controller on the I/O board)
– SecuRAID321 Disk Array Controller (SCSI 2ch)
Other optional boards
– Adaptec 29320 SCSI Controller
– SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b 1 Disk Controller
Updating System
If you modified the Windows system, execute "Update Express5800 system" in Master Control Menu.
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Which Has Been Upgraded to Dynamic Disk
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk, note
the following issue:
Do not select the partition where the operating system had been installed as the partition to install the
operating system newly.
Select "Use the current File System" for the format of the operating system partition.
MO Device
If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation, the file system will not be
converted normally. Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from the beginning.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-2
Media such as DAT
During the operating system installation, do not attach unnecessary media for operating system installation to the
system, such as DAT.
Partition Size
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size + Application Size
Size necessary to install the system= 4100 MB
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size × 1.5
Dump file Size
Application Size
= Mounted Memory Size + 1 MB
= Required Size
IMPORTANT:
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information
(memory dump). The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in
the boot drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory
shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set the paging file size large enough for
the entire system.
The dump file size for the system with more than 2 GB memory mounted is '2048 MB +
1 MB'.
If you install any application program, add necessary space to the partition to install
these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as
follows:
4100 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 1 MB) + Application Size
= 5381 MB + Application Size
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it
cannot be reserved in one disk.
1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".
2. See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) is to be written to a
separate disk.
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the file size to be written, then after installing the
system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size," install an additional new disk.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-3
INSTALLING Windows Server™ 2003 X64 EDITIONS
Preparations for Installation
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard x64 Edition (CD-ROM)
User's Guide
Getting Started
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
Creating "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
NOTE: If you have already "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER" for Express5800 Server which you are going to install Windows
Server 2003 x64 Edition, you do not need to create it again.
You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two
procedures:
Create from the menu which appears when running Express5800 Server with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
If you have only Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.
If Windows Server 2003 or Windows NT 4.0 can be operated on Express5800 Server, you can use the other
procedure described later.
Follow the steps below:
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2. Turn on your Express5800 Server.
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt and Delete to reboot the server. (You may also turn off and then
on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.
5. Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].
6. Select [Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER] from [Create Support
Disk] menu.
7. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the on-screen instruction.
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it in a safe place.
Create from [Master Control Menu]
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.
– Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions
– Windows Server™ 2003
– Windows® XP x64 Edition
– Windows® XP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-4
– Windows® 2000
– Windows® Me/98/95
– Windows NT® 4.0
You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from [Master
Control Menu], if you have a computer on which one of the above operating systems operates.
Follow the steps below:
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2. Run Windows Me/98/95, or Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0, Windows XP.
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
[Master Control Menu] will appear.
4. Click [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then [for Windows Server 2003 x64].
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu displayed by a Right-click.
5. Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it in a safe place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-5
Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions.
1. Turn on the system power.
2. Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3. Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press Enter while the message "Press
any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.
The Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions setup screen will appear.
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.
Begin after turning on the system power again.
4. Press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states.
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." is displayed.
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed.
5. When the following message is displayed, press S.
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage device(s).
The following message is displayed.
Please insert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
*Press ENTER when ready.
6. Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk
drive, and press Enter.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
7. Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.
– MegaRAID PCI Express(TM) ROMB (When on-board RAID is installed.)
– MegaRAID SCSI 320-2 RAID Controller Driver (When N8103-81F board is installed.)
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear.
For details, refer to "Getting Started".
After installation is completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver Installation and Advanced Settings"
and "Updating the System" of this manual.
Procedure for License Authentication
Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label in which the
product key contained in Windows Server 2003 is written.
NOTES:
Execute the activation within 30 days. System may be locked after 30 days is passed.
COA label may be attached to your server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-6
Updating the System
To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures.
1. Logon to the system using the administrator account or another account which is a member of the
Administrators group.
2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu is automatically displayed on the screen.
3. Click [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Update Express5800 system] section.
4. Continue your work for system update as the following message.
5. Click [Restart Computer] to restart the system.
6. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive immediately after clicking on
[Restart Computer]
IMPORTANT: If you change the configuration of the system (by adding or removing
hardware or Operating system software components) or repair the system, you must run the
system update again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-7
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS
This section describes how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.
For information on installing and setting up a driver that is not described in this section, please refer to the document
attached to the driver.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and
enhances throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to use these features.
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet:
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start and click [Windows Explorer].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
Click Start, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3. Run "DXSETUP.EXE" in the following directory:
CD-ROM DriveLetter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS1\PROSET\WS03_32E
The [Intel(R) PROSet - Install Shield Wizard] dialog starts.
4. Click [Next].
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6. Click [Install].
7. When [Install Shield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
8. Restart the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-8
Network Driver
Specifying the details of network driver.
One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and Duplex mode need
to be specified manually.
[When PROSet is not installed]
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
1. Click Start, [Control Panel], [Network Connections], and click[Local Area Connection].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
1. Click Start, [Settings] and click [Network Connections].
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from drop down menu.
2. Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for network adapter is displayed.
3. Click [Advanced] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
[When PROSet is installed]
1. Open the [Device Manager]
2. Double-click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3. Click [Link] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.
4. Click [OK].
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from [Network
and Dial-up Connection].
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding Services]. [Network
Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet) that the computer installing [Network
Monitor] sends or receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For
information on how to install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving Problems" described
later in this chapter.
Optional Network Board Driver
If you want to use optional Network Board (INTEL PRO/1000 F 64-BIT PCI / INTEL PRO/1000 TX 64-BIT PCI / 11B
PCI-X PRO/1000 MT DUAL), the network driver will be installed automatically. Therefore, the driver attached to the
Network board should not be used.
Re-install the Network Driver
The network driver will be installed automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-9
Graphics Accelerator Driver
The standard graphics accelerator driver installed by "Update Express5800 system" is automatically installed.
The following is the procedure when it is necessary to install it manually.
If you want to use an optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board, follow the document attached to the board to install
the driver.
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Click Start, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3. Run "Setup.exe" in the following directory.
<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\VIDEO\setup.exe.
4. Follow the message to continue the installation.
If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." appears, select [Yes] to continue.
5. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive, follow the on-screen instructions
and restart the system.
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Adaptec 29320 / SCSI U160
PCI-ATX-64b)
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321)
To additionally install the SecuRAID 321 in a system containing Windows Server 2003, connect the controller and
install the driver as follows:
1. When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box is displayed, click [Next].
2. When the [Install Hardware Device Drivers] dialog box is displayed, select [Search for a suitable driver for
my device (Recommended)], and click [Next].
3. When the [Locate Driver Files] dialog box is displayed, select [Floppy disk drives], insert "Windows Server
2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive, and click [Next].
4. When the [Driver Files Search Results] dialog box is displayed, click [Next].
5. Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completion of the new hardware detection wizard] dialog box is
displayed. Click [Complete].
SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP
(DEBUG INFORMATION)
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-10
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E
Installing Windows Server™ 2003
This section describes the procedures for installing Windows Server™ 2003 without using Express Setup tool.
BEFORE INSTALLING Windows Server™ 2003
Please read carefully the following information BEFORE commencing your Windows Server™ 2003 Installation.
Optional Boards Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards:
NOTE: If you want to install other boards by using a driver floppy disk ("OEM-FD for
Mass storage device") than the ones listed below, see "Exceptional setup" and "Installing
Optional Mass Storage Driver" of "Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6.
Supporting installation of the operating system in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
– On Board RAID (Controller on the I/O board)
– SecuRAID 321 Disk Array Controller (SCSI 2ch)
Other optional boards
– Initio 101 SCSI Controller
– Adaptec 29320 SCSI Controller
– SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b Disk Controller
Updating System
If you modified the Windows system, execute "Update Express5800 system" in Master Control Menu.
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Which Has Been Upgraded to Dynamic Disk
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk, note
the following issue:
Do not select the partition where the operating system had been installed as the partition to install the
operating system newly.
Select "Use the current File System" for the format of operating system partition.
MO Device
If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation, the file system will not be
converted normally. Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from the beginning.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-2
Media such as DAT
During the operating system installation, do not attach unnecessary media for operating system installation to the
system, such as DAT.
Partition Size
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size + Application Size
Size necessary to install the system = 2900 MB
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size * 1.5
Dump File Size
Application Size
= Mounted Memory Size + 12 MB
= Required Size
IMPORTANT:
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information
(memory dump). The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in
the boot drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory
shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set the paging file size large enough for
the entire system.
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095 MB. If the
above paging file size exceeds 4095 MB, specify 4095 MB for the paging file size.
The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2 GB memory mounted is
'2048 MB + 12 MB'.
If you install any application program, add necessary space to the partition to install
these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as
follows:
2900 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 12 MB) + Application Size = 4192 MB + Application Size
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it
cannot be reserved in one disk.
1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".
2. See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) is to be written to a
separate disk.
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the file size to be written, then after installing the
system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size," install an additional new disk.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-3
INSTALLING Windows Server 2003
Preparations for Installation
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition (CD-ROM) or Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003
Enterprise Edition (CD-ROM)
User's Guide
Getting Started
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
NOTE: If you have already "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER" for Express5800 Server which you are going to install Windows
Server 2003, you do not need to create it again.
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two procedures:
Create from the menu which appears when running Express5800 Server with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
If you have only Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.
If Windows Server 2003 or Windows NT 4.0 can be operated on Express5800 Server, you can use the other
procedure described later.
Follow the steps below:
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2. Turn on your Express5800 Server.
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt and Delete to reboot the server. (You may also turn off and then
on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.
5. Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].
6. Select [Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER] from [Create Support Disk] menu.
7. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the on-screen instruction.
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it in a safe place.
Create from [Master Control Menu]
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.
– Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions
– Windows Server™ 2003
– Windows® XP x64 Edition
– Windows® XP
– Windows® 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-4
– Windows® Me/98/95
– Windows NT® 4.0
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from [Master Control
Menu], if you have a computer on which one of the above operating systems operates.
Follow the steps below:
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2. Run Windows Me/98/95, or Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0, Windows XP.
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
[Master Control Menu] will appear.
4. Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then [for Windows Server 2003].
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu displayed by a right-click.
5. Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it in a safe place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-5
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003.
1. Turn on the system power.
2. Insert the Windows Server™ 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3. Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press Enter while the message "Press
any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.
The Windows Server 2003 setup screen will be displayed.
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.
Restart after turning on the system power again.
4. Press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states.
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." is displayed.
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed.
5. When the following message is displayed, press S.
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage device(s).
The following message is displayed.
Please insert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
*Press ENTER when ready.
6. Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive, and
press Enter.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
Select the [LSI MEGARAID Products for Windows 2003 (x86)] and press Enter.
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that are displayed.
For details, refer to "Getting Started".
After installation is completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver Installation and Advanced Settings"
and "Updating the System" of this manual.
Procedure for License Authentication
Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label in which the
product key contained in Windows Server 2003 is written.
NOTES:
Execute the activation within 30 days. System may be locked after 30 days is passed.
COA label may be attached to your server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-6
Updating the System
To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures.
1. Logon to the system using the administrator account or another account which is a member of the
Administrators group.
2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu is automatically displayed on the screen.
3. Click [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Update Express5800 system] section.
4. Continue your work for system update as the following message.
5. Click [Restart Computer] to restart the system.
6. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive immediately after clicking
[Restart Computer]
IMPORTANT: If you change the configuration of the system (by adding or removing
hardware or Operating system software components) or repair the system, you must run the
system update again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-7
Upgrade Installation
NOTE: If you are using the Adaptec 29160, please carry out after removing it.
1. Procedures below upgrade the installed Windows 2000 to Windows Server 2003.
2. Power on the system and start Windows 2000.
3. Log on as an administrator.
4. Insert the Windows Server™ 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Then, [Select an operation] dialog will be displayed.
NOTE: If the [Select an operation] dialog box is not displayed, start \SETUP.EXE from
CD-ROM drive.
5. Select [Install Windows Server 2003].
Then, a dialog box asks to select upgrade or clear installation.
6. Select "Upgrade (recommended)" and click Next.
Follow the messages and continue. The system will automatically restart after copying the files.
NOTE: You can leave the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
7. If a disk array controller is attached to the device, press F6 while a message, "Setup is inspecting your
computer's hardware configuration...", is on the screen.
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed.
8. When the following message is displayed, press S.
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage device(s).
The following message is displayed.
Please insert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
*Press ENTER when ready.
9. Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive, and
press Enter.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
Select the [LSI MEGARAID Products for Windows 2003 (x86)] and press Enter.
10. Update the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-8
11. Install the driver and make detailed settings.
If PROSet is already installed, uninstall PROSet before upgrading.
If the teaming function is enabled, disable this function before uninstalling PROSet.
During upgrade installation, [Disk Insert] dialog box may be displayed.
If it is displayed, insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy
disk drive, and click [OK].
[Files Needed] dialog box may be displayed.
Enter "a:\" into "Copy files from:" and then click [OK].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-9
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS
This section describes how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.
For information on installing and setting up a driver that is not described in this section, please refer to the document
attached to the driver.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and
enhance throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to use these features.
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start and click [Windows Explorer].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
Click Start, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3. Run "PROSET.EXE" in the following directory:
<CD-ROM DriveLetter>:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC5\PROSET\WS03XP32
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.
4. Click [Next].
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6. Choose "Typical" and click [Next].
7. Click [Install].
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
9. Restart the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-10
Network Driver
Specifying the details of network driver.
Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and Duplex mode
need to be specified manually.
[When PROSet is not installed]
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box is displayed.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
1. Click Start, Click [Control Panel], Click [Network Connections], and Click [Local Area Connection].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
1. Click Start, [Settings] and click [Network Connections].
The [Network Connections] dialog box is displayed.
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from drop down menu.
2. Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for network adapter is displayed.
3. Click [Advanced] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
[When PROSet is installed]
1. The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start, point to [Control Panel] and click [Intel PROSet].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
1. Click Start, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].
2. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet] on the [Control Panel] window.
2. Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3. Click [Speed] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.
4. Click [Apply] and click [OK].
Specify the other network driver the same as above.
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be displayed from [Network
and Dial-up Connection].
NOTE: We recommend you add "Network Monitor" at "Adding Services".
"Network Monitor" can monitor frames (or packets) sent or received by a computer on
which "Network Monitor" is installed. This is an effective tool for analyzing network faults.
For information about the installation procedure, see Chapter 6.
Re-install the Network Driver
The network driver will be installed automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-11
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Initio 101 / Adaptec 29320)
If you use SCSI controller driver (Initio 101 / Adaptec 29320), install it according to the following procedure:
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer
Management].
2. Double-click the SCSI Controller driver that Device Manager lists as unknown device.
3. Click [Update Driver].
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" is displayed, select "Install from a list or specific location
[Advanced]" and click [Next].
5. Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].
6. Click [Have Disk..].
7. Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive, enter
"a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].
8. Specify the following driver and click [Next].
– [INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller] (When Initio 101 board is installed.)
– [Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP - Ultra320 SCSI] (When Adaptec 29320 board is installed.)
The installation of the driver is completed.
Restart the system according to the message displayed on the screen.
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b)
If you use SCSI controller driver (SCSI U160 PCI-ATX-64b), update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
CD-ROM attached to your system.
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321)
To additionally install the SecuRAID 321 in a system containing Windows Server 2003, connect the controller and
install the driver as follows:
1. When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box is displayed, click [Next].
2. When the [Install Hardware Device Drivers] dialog box is displayed, select [Search for a suitable driver for
my device (Recommended)], and click [Next].
3. When the [Locate Driver Files] dialog box is displayed, select [Floppy disk drives], insert "Windows Server
2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive, and click [Next].
4. When the [Driver Files Search Results] dialog box is displayed, click [Next].
5. Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completion of the new hardware detection wizard] dialog box
below is displayed. Click [Complete].
SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP
(DEBUG INFORMATION)
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-12
This page is left intentionally blank
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F
Product Configuration Record Table
Use this table for information about setup and system environment change.
Hardware
Main Unit
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Processor
#1
Clock
Clock
Clock
Clock
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
#2
#3
#4
Memory
Group #1
Group #2
Group #3
Group #4
Group #5
Group #6
Group #7
Group #8
Monitor
Size
Size
Size
Size
Size
Size
Size
Size
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Type
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Hard Disk Drive (Standard)
ID0
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Type number
Type
Date Installed
Serial No.
Capacity
Type number
Type
Date Installed
Serial No.
Capacity
Type number
Type
Date Installed
Serial No.
Capacity
Type number
Type
Date Installed
Serial No.
Capacity
Type number
Date Installed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F-2
Hard Disk Drive (Option)
ID0
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID8
ID9
ID10
ID11
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Type number
Type
Date Installed
Serial No.
Capacity
Type number
Type
Date Installed
Serial No.
Capacity
Type number
Type
Date Installed
Serial No.
Capacity
Type number
Type
Date Installed
Serial No.
Capacity
Type number
Type
Date Installed
Serial No.
Capacity
Type number
Type
Date Installed
Serial No.
Capacity
Type number
Type
Date Installed
Serial No.
Capacity
Type number
Date Installed
Backup Device
Slot 1
Size
Capacity
Serial No.
Model name
Size
Type number
Capacity
Date Installed
Serial No.
Slot 2
Model name
Type number
Date Installed
PCI Slot #1
Model name
Model name
Model name
Model name
Model name
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
PCI Slot #2
PCI Slot #3
PCI Slot #4
PCI Slot #5
PCI Slot #6
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F-3
PCI Slot #7
PCI Slot #8
PCI Slot #9
Printer
Model name
Model name
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Model name
Manufacturer
Serial No.
Date Installed
Additional Cabinet for Disk
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
External Peripheral Device 1
Model name
Manufacturer
External Peripheral Device 2
Serial No.
Date Installed
Model name
Manufacturer
Serial No.
Date Installed
Display
Keyboard
Mouse
Model name
Manufacturer
Serial No.
Date Installed
Model name
Manufacturer
Serial No.
Date Installed
Model name
Manufacturer
Serial No.
Date Installed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F-4
Software
Firmware version
Operating System
Application of RUR media
File system
Name:
Name:
HPFS
Version:
Version:
Apply
FAT
NTFS
Others (
)
Bundled software installed
Licensed software installed
Application running when a failure occurred
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|